2010 XTERRA OWNER'S MANUAL

2010 XTERRAOWNER'S MANUAL

2010 N

ISS

AN

XTE

RR

AN

50-D

Printing : July 2009 (09)Publication No.: OM0E-0N50U0

Printed in U.S.A.For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

N50-D

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance require-ments, assisting you in the safe operation of yourvehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenchildren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drivemodels, a mark is placed at the begin-ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features foroff-road use, failure to operate four-wheeldrive models correctly may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident. Be sure to read“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passengercar because it has a higher center ofgravity for off-road use. As with othervehicles with features of this type, fail-ure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read “On-pavement and off-road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-ing collision and rollover”, and “Drivingsafety precautions”, in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modi-fications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORYSome vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-ies, may contain perchlorate material. Thefollowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed toVisteon.

XM Radio� requiressubscription, soldseparately after first 90days. Not available inAlaska, Hawaii orGuam. For moreinformation, visitwww.xmradio.com.

© 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

1. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-14)2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-44)3. Front seat belts (P. 1-14)4. Head restraints (P.1-4)5. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-44)6. Seats (P. 1-2)7. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-51)8. Seat belts with pretensioners (P. 1-57)9. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P.1-56)10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-29)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0134

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-9)2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-24)3. Windshield (P. 8-19)4. Power windows (P. 2-45)5. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-3, 3-5, 3-2)6. Mirrors (P. 3-13)7. Tire pressure (P. 8-32)8. Flat tire (P. 6-2)9. Tire chains (P. 5-35)10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-26)12. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-29)13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P.6-11)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0058

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Roof rack (P. 2-43)2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)3. Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch(P. 2-26)

4. Rear window washer (P.2-25)5. Lift gate (P. 3-9)6. Spare tire (P.6-2)7. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)8. Fuel-filler door (P.3-10)9. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-5)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0057

EXTERIOR REAR


1. Map lights (P. 2-48)2. Sun visors (P. 3-12)3. Inside mirror (P.3-13)4. Glove box (P. 2-36)5. Console box (P. 2-36)6. Front seats (P. 1-2)7. Rear seats (P.1-11)8. Storage (P. 2-35)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0056

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


1. Vents (P. 4-2)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-26)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped)/Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped)(P. 4-35, P. 4-37)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-44, P. 2-30)

5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicatorlights (P. 2-3, 2-12)

6. Cruise control main/set switches(P. 5-18)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch andrear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)

8. Storage (P. 2-35)9. Audio system controls (P. 4-17)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-44)11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-36)12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-53)13. Auxiliary audio input jack

(if so equipped) (P. 4-33)14. Power outlet (P. 2-34)

WIC1447

INSTRUMENT PANEL


15. Electronic locking rear differential(E-Lock) system switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-32)Hill descent control switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-31)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-31)

16. Shift selector (P. 5-12)17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-21)18. Climate controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-9)19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-30)20. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)21. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-12)22. Off road lamps switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-29)23. Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)24. Power outside mirror controls

(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.


VQ40DE engine

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir(P. 8-13)

2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)3. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-22)4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (MT model) (P. 8-12)7. Air cleaner (P. 8-17)8. Drive belt location (P.8-16)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)11. Battery (P. 8-13)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0167

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warn-ing light

2-13

Automatic transmis-sion oil temperaturewarning light (if soequipped)

2-13

Automatic transmis-sion park warninglight (model)

2-13

or

Brake warning light 2-14

Charge warninglight

2-14

Door open warninglight

2-14

Warninglight

Name Page

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-14

4WD warning light( model)

2-15

Low fuel warninglight

2-15

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-15

Low windshieldwasher fluid warninglight

2-17

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-17

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-17

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Automatic transmis-sion position indica-tor light (A/T modelsonly)

2-17

Cruise main switchindicator light

2-17

Cruise set switchindicator light

2-18

Electronic lockingrear differential (E-Lock) system onindicator light (if soequipped)

2-18

4WD shift indicatorlight (model)

2-18

Front passenger airbag status light

2-18

High beam indicatorlight (Blue)

2-18

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS


Indicatorlight

Name Page

Hill descent controlsystem on indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-31

Malfunction Indica-tor Lamp (MIL)

2-19

Overdrive off indica-tor light (A/T modelsonly)

2-19

Security indicatorlight

2-19

Slip indicator light 2-20

Transfer 4LO posi-tion indicator light( model)

2-20

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-20

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Vehicle DynamicControl OFF indica-tor light

2-21


1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Adjustable headrest (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29Rear-facing child restraint installation usingLATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31Rear-facing child restraint installation usingthe seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Forward-facing child restraint installationusing LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36Forward-facing child restraint installationusing the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59

WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort. Seatbelts are most effective when the pas-senger sits well back and straight up inthe seat. If the seatback is reclined, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andbeing injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N(Neutral) position with the parking brake fullyapplied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped)Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height ofthe seat cushion to the desired position.

WRS0175 WRS0176 WRS0131

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Lumbar support (if so equipped)

The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the seat lumbar area.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve-hicle safety systems. They may provideadditional protection against injury in cer-tain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrestraints properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the head restraint stalks orremove the head restraint. Do not use theseat if the head restraint has been re-moved. If the head restraint was removed,reinstall and properly adjust the head re-straint before an occupant uses the seat-ing position. Failure to follow these in-structions can reduce the effectiveness ofthe head restraints. This may increase therisk of serious injury or death in acollision.

The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with head restraints. All of the headrestraints are adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped witha head restraint.

WRS0389 LRS0900


Components1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

AdjustmentAdjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888


To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe head restraint down.

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highestposition.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is notloose in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the head restraintbefore an occupant uses the seating posi-tion.

Install1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint isfacing the correct direction. The stalk withthe adjustment notches �1 must be installedin the hole with the lock button �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push thehead restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before anoccupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891


Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-ing the force that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward movementand helping absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly asdescribed in this section.

ADJUSTABLE HEADREST (if soequipped)

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement theother vehicle safety systems. They mayprovide additional protection against in-jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustthe headrests properly, as specified in thissection. Check the adjustment aftersomeone else uses the seat. Do not attachanything to the adjustable headrest stalksor remove the adjustable headrests. Donot use the seat if the adjustable head-rests have been removed. If the headrestwas removed, reinstall and properly adjustthe headrest before an occupant uses theseating position. Failure to follow theseinstructions can reduce the effectivenessof the adjustable headrests. This may in-crease the risk of serious injury or death ina collision.

The illustration shows the seating positionsequipped with adjustable headrests. All of theheadrests are adjustable.

� Indicates the seating position is equipped withan adjustable headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equippedwith a head restraint or adjustable headrest.

SPA1025 LRS0901


Components1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

AdjustmentAdjust the headrest so the center is level with thecenter of the seat occupant’s ears.

To raise the headrest, pull it up.LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888


To lower, push and hold the lock knob and pushthe headrest down.

RemovalUse the following procedure to remove the ad-justable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loosein the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the headrest be-fore an occupant uses the seating position.

Install1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure the headrest is facingthe correct direction. The stalk with the ad-justment notches �1 must be installed in thehole with the lock button �2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push theheadrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-cupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891


FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seats when they arein the fold-down position. In a collision,people riding in these areas withoutproper restraints are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

● Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.

● Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide significantprotection against injury in an accident.Always replace and adjust them prop-erly if they have been removed for anyreason.

● If the head restraints are removed forany reason, they should be securelystored to prevent them from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

Folding the front passenger’s seatback(if so equipped)To fold the front passenger’s seatback flat forextra storage length when transporting longitems:

�1 Slide the seat to the rearmost position. Liftup on the recline lever, located on the out-side edge of the seat, and fold the seatbackforward as far as it will go. Then lift up on thelatch located on the upper corner of theseatback to release the back of the seat.

LRS0608


�2 Once the seatback is released, it will enableyou to fold the front passenger seatback flatover the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passenger’s seat to aseating position, lift up on the seatback andpush it up to an upright position. Then pull upon the recline lever and lean the seatback toa proper seating position. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

WARNING

● If you fold the front passenger’s seat-back flat forward to carry longer ob-jects, be sure this cargo is properly se-cured and not near an air bag. In acrash, an inflating air bag might forcethat object toward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even death. Se-cure objects away from the area inwhich an air bag would inflate. See“Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem” later in this section.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the front passenger’s seatwhen it is in the fold-down position. Useof these areas by passengers could re-sult in serious injury in an accident orsudden stop.

Folding the 2nd row bench seat

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximumcargo hauling:

LRS0609 LRS0577


�1 Disconnect and secure the center seat beltand tongues into the retractor base. See“Stowing the center seat belt” later in thissection. Then properly stow the outboardseat belts in the seat belt hooks before fold-ing down the rear seats. See “Seat belthook” in this section for more information.Lower the head restraints to the full “down”position. Pull the strap forward, located inthe center of each seat cushion, and foldeach seat cushion toward the front of thevehicle.

�2 Then pull the straps located on the outsideedge of each seatback to fold the seatbacksforward.

�3 This provides a level cargo floor.LRS0578 LRS0579


�4 To return the bench seats to a seating posi-tion, reverse this process. Raise the seat-backs to an upright position. Makesure to hold the seat belts above theseat cushion, then push the seat cush-ion down into place.

Removing the 2nd row bench seatcushions

The rear seat cushion can be removed to provideadditional space when folding the 2nd row seat-backs flat. To remove the 2nd row bench seatcushions:

1. Pull the straps forward, located in the centerof each seat cushion, to fold the seat cush-ions forward.

2. Lift up and fold each of the red releasehandles on the seat base toward the front ofthe vehicle. This will release the seat cushionfrom the seat base.

3. Then lift up on the seat cushion to remove itfrom the seat base. Be sure to store it in asecure place.

To return the rear seatback to a seating position:

1. Push the anchor bars on the bottom of theseat cushions down into the seat base.

2. Rotate the seat cushion toward the rear ofthe vehicle and push down until they arefolded flat to secure each seat cushion to theseat base. Make sure to hold the seatbelts above the seat cushion and prop-erly push the seat cushion down intoplace.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly. Never ride in the rearseat unless the seat bottom cushionsare in place and latched.

LRS0580 LRS0585


● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured. If they are not com-pletely secured in the latched position,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● If the seat cushions are removed for anyreason, they should be securely storedto prevent them from causing injury topassengers or damage to the vehicle incase of sudden braking or an accident.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS


WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016


WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● No changes should be made to the seatbelt system. For example, do not modifythe seat belt, add material, or installdevices that may change the seat beltrouting or tension. Doing so may affectthe operation of the seat belt system.Modifying or tampering with the seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-vated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-sioner system components should bedone by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

SSS0014


PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest.Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

�1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in thissection.

Manual seat shownWRS0174


�2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

�3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

�4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have two modesof operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modeallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allowthe driver and passengers some freedom ofmovement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly or duringcertain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for childrestraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by an occupant, the ALR modeshould not be activated. If it is activated, itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion. It can also change the operation ofthe front passenger air bag. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

LRS0594 LRS0595


WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

�1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139


Center of the rear bench seatThe center seat belt has a connector tongue �1

and a seat belt tongue �2 . Both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue must be securelylatched for proper seat belt operation.

WARNING

● Always fasten the connector tongueand the seat belt in the order shown.

● Always make sure both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue aresecured when using the seat belt orinstalling a child restraint. Do not usethe seat belt or child restraint with onlythe seat belt tongue attached. Thiscould result in serious personal injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop.

SSS0240 SSS0241

LRS0601


Stowing the center seat belt

When folding down the rear seat, the rear centerseat belt can be retracted into a stowed positionas follows:

1. Hold the connector tongue �1 so that theseat belt does not retract suddenly when thetongue is released from the connectorbuckle.

2. Insert a suitable tool such as a key �A intothe connector buckle and release the con-nector tongue �1 .

3. Fold the connector as illustrated �2 .

4. Then secure the connector tongue into theretractor base �3 in the ceiling.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

LRS0602


Attaching the center seat belt

Always be sure the center seat belt connectortongue and connector buckle are attached. Dis-connect only when folding down the rear seat.

To connect the buckle:

�1 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the retrac-tor base.

�2 Pull out the connector tongue from themolded retractor base.

�3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiverbuckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re-ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < mark.

The center seat belt connector tongue can beattached only into the rear center seat belt con-nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seatbelts” earlier in this section.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop. 2nd row center seat belt comfort

guideWhen using the 2nd row center seat belt it maybe necessary to use the comfort guide to adjustthe shoulder belt height for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help obtain properseat belt fit.

1. Raise the head restraint on the 2nd rowdriver’s side seating position. Remove thecomfort guide from the stowed position bypulling the cord from the channel.

LRS0611


2. Insert the shoulder belt into the back of thecomfort guide so that the seat belt lays flat inthe guide. Be sure that the comfort guideroutes the seat belt properly over the centerof your shoulder and across your chest. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off of your shoulder.

3. To return the seat belt comfort guide to thestowed position, route the comfort guidestrap in the channel under the 2nd row driv-er’s side seating position head restraint andattach the guide in the clip.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (frontand 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out �1 the adjustment button andmove the shoulder belt anchor �2 to the desiredposition, so the belt passes over the center of theshoulder. The belt should be away from your faceand neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re-lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulderbelt anchor into position.

LRS0610 LRS0612Front and 2nd row outboard seats

LRS0242


WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when foldingdown the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts onthe seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

LRS0583


● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Forward-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facingchild restraints. Forward-facing child restraintsare available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.Booster seats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longeruse a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle byusing either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seatbelt. See “Child Restraints” section for more in-formation.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.Studies show that children are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat than inthe front seat.

CHILD SAFETY


This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

INFANTSInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDRENChildren that are over one year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a childrestraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lapportion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-men. The booster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly positionedacross the top, middle portion of the shoulderand the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seatcan only be used in seating positions that have athree-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-fying that it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. Once the child has grown sothe shoulder belt is no longer on or near the faceand neck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoarea. The child could be seriously injuredor killed in a sudden stop or collision.


PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Failure to follow the warnings and in-structions for proper use and installa-tion of child restraints could result inserious injury or death of a child orother passengers in a sudden stop orcollision:

– The child restraint must be used andinstalled properly. Always follow allof the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.

– Infants and children should never beheld on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-gest adult cannot resist the forces ofa collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both achild and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all childrestraints be installed in the rearseat. Studies show that children aresafer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a forward-facing childrestraint in the front seat, see“Forward-facing child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” laterin this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the frontseat. An inflating air bag could seri-ously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only beused in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraintthat will fit the child and vehicle.Some child restraints may not fitproperly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS


– Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand loads from childrestraints that are properly fitted.

– Never use the anchor points for adultseat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tetherstrap should not be used in the frontpassenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should alwaysbe placed in an appropriate child re-straint while in the vehicle.

● When the child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, loose objects can injure occu-pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle canbecome very hot. Check the seating sur-face and buckles before placing a child inthe child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem. Some child restraints include rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that can be con-nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-tem” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and children of various sizes. When se-lecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated. Canadian law requires thetop tether strap on forward-facing childrestraints be secured to the designated an-chor point on the vehicle.


LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints. This system may also be referredto as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-tions for proper use and installation ofchild restraints could result in serious in-jury or death of a child or other passen-gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatiblechild restraints only at the locationsshown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position usingthe LATCH lower anchors. The childrestraint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-ing your fingers into the lower anchorarea. Feel to make sure there are noobstructions over the anchors suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushionmaterial. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the lower an-chors are obstructed.

LATCH lower anchor locationThe LATCH lower anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. A label isattached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH lower anchors.

LATCH system lower anchor locationsWRS0438

LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0700


Installing child restraint LATCH loweranchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in the in-structions provided by the child restraint manu-facturer.

The child restraint top tether strap must be usedwhen installing the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Toptether anchor” for installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor point locationsLRS0589

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662


Top tether anchor

WARNING

Do not allow cargo to contact the toptether strap when it is attached to the toptether anchor. Properly secure the cargoso it does not contact the top tether strap.Cargo that is not properly secured orcargo that contacts the top tether strapmay damage it during a collision. A childcould be seriously injured or killed in acollision if the top tether strap isdamaged.

Top tether anchor point locationsAnchor points are located in the following loca-tions:

● 2nd row bench on the floor behind the out-board seating positions as shown.

● 2nd row bench center seatback as shown.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, consult your NISSANdealer for details.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING LATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCHsystem:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

2nd row bench seatLRS0588


2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

3. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 3LRS0673


4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint or try installing byusing the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTINSTALLATION USING THE SEATBELTS

Rear-facing – step 4LRS0674 WRS0256


WARNING

● The three-point seat belt with Auto-matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must beused when installing a child restraint.Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orbe loose and cause injury to a child in asudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in thissection.

● When installing a child restraint systemin the rear center position, both thecenter seat belt connector tongue andbuckle tongue must be secured. See“Attaching the rear center seat belt” inthis section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256



3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatback whilepulling up on the seat belt.





6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGLATCHRefer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint in the 2nd row seats using theLATCH system:


2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Installing top tether strap” in thissection. Do not install child restraints thatrequire the use of a top tether strap in seat-ing positions that do not have a top tetheranchor.


Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2WRS0799


3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the headrestto obtain the correct child restraint fit. If theheadrest is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to reinstall the headrestwhen the child restraint is removed.See “Adjustable headrest” in this section forhead restraint adjustment information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable headrest and it is interfering withthe proper child restraint fit, try another seat-ing position or a different child restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing-mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment path. The child re-straint should not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forwardand check to see if the LATCH attachmentholds the restraint in place. If the restraint isnot secure, tighten the LATCH attachmentas necessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 4LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 5WRS0697


6. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 5.

FORWARD-FACING CHILDRESTRAINT INSTALLATION USINGTHE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with AutomaticLocking Retractor (ALR) must be usedwhen installing a child restraint. Failure touse the ALR mode will result in the childrestraint not being properly secured. Therestraint could tip over or be loose andcause injury to a child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

When installing a child restraint system inthe rear center position, both the centerseat belt connector tongue and buckletongue must be secured. See “Attachingthe rear center seat belt” in this section.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat belt in therear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in aforward-facing direction only. Movethe seat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and, there-fore, must not be used in the front seat.


The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint or headrest to obtain the correct childrestraint fit. If the head restraint or headrestis removed, store it in a secure place. Besure to reinstall the head restraint orheadrest when the child restraint isremoved. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-able headrest” in this section for head re-straint or headrest adjustment, removal andinstallation information.

If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint or headrest and itis interfering with the proper child restraintfit, try another seating position or a differentchild restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –step 1

WRS0699


3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “In-stalling top tether strap” in this section. Donot install child restraints that require the useof a top tether strap in seating positions thatdo not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts toEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.





6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the child restraint nearthe seat belt path. The child restraint shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm), fromside to side. Try to tug it forward and checkto see if the belt holds the restraint in place.If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seatbelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You may needto try a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.


9. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 7.




10. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light should illuminate. If thislight is not illuminated see, �Front passengerair bag and status light� in this section.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCHlower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe head restraint �1 with the head restraintin the full “down” position.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint �2 on the seat directly behind the childrestraint.


If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap, consult your NISSANdealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not usedproperly, the risk of a child being injuredin a sudden stop or collision greatlyincreases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion ofthe belt is away from the child’s faceand neck and the lap portion of thebelt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is notbehind the child or under the child’sarm.

– A booster seat must only be installedin a seating position that has alap/shoulder belt.

Forward-facing — step 10WRS0475 LRS0588


Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat �1 is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat �2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place the child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with thechild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464


Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in theAutomatic Locking Retractor mode whenusing a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “ChildSafety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-straint or headrest to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. If the head restraint or head-rest is removed, store it in a secure place. Besure to reinstall the head restraint orheadrest when the booster seat is re-moved. See “Head restraints” or “Adjust-able headrests” in this section for head re-straint or headrest adjustment, removal andinstallation information.

WRS0699Front passenger position

LRS0454


If the seating position does not have anadjustable head restraint or headrest and itis interfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting theseat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in “Three-point type seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, place the ignition switch inthe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe following systems:

● Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air BagSystem)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the chest area of thedriver and front passenger in certain side impactcollisions. The side air bags are designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM


Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag system: Thissystem can help cushion the impact force to thehead of occupants in front and rear outboardseating positions in certain side impact or rollovercollisions. In a side impact, the curtain and roll-over air bags are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, bothcurtain and rollover air bags are designed toinflate and remain inflated for a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-tance away from the steering wheel, instrumentpanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlierin this section for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After placing the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

WRS0031


● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheAdvanced Air Bag System monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

ARS1133


WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain and rollover air bagsinflate if they are not properly re-strained. Pre-teens and children shouldbe properly restrained in the rear seat, ifpossible.

ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043


WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section fordetails.

ARS1044 ARS1045 WRS0256


WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact and rollover supplemental airbags:

● The side air bags and curtain and roll-over air bags ordinarily will not inflate inthe event of a frontal impact, rear im-pact, or lower severity side collision.Always wear your seat belts to helpreduce the risk or severity of injury invarious kinds of accidents.

Do not lean against the door.WRS0431

Do not lean against doors or windows.WRS0365

Do not lean against doors or windows.SSS0162


WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain and rollover air bags are mosteffective when you are sitting well backand upright in the seat. The side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

WRS0363 SSS0159


1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bags

2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)3. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules4. Crash zone sensor5. Occupant classification system control

unit6. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor)7. Satellite sensors8. Seat belt buckle switches9. Seat belt with pretensioner10. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modulesNISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

WRS0871


The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger supplemental front-impact air bag ismounted in the dashboard above the glove box.The front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper front air bag system opera-tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision and seat beltusage for the driver. For the front passenger, itadditionally monitors the weight of an occupantor object on the seat and seat belt tension. Basedon information from the sensors, only one front airbag may inflate in a crash, depending on thecrash severity and whether the front occupantsare belted or unbelted. Additionally, the frontpassenger air bag may be automatically turnedOFF under some conditions, depending on theweight detected on the passenger seat and howthe seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will beilluminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light willnot be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the front occupants. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thefront air bags inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.


Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated near the climate controls. The light oper-ates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec-tion: The light is OFF to indicate thatthe front passenger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). Based on theweight on the seat detected by the occupantclassification sensor and the belt tension de-tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air BagSystem determines whether the front passengerair bag should be automatically turned OFF asrequired by the regulations.

WRS0475


Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode,this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seatbelt properly for the most effective protection bythe seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and childrenbe properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN alsorecommends that appropriate child restraints andbooster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. Ifthis is not possible, the occupant classificationsensor and seat belt sensors are designed tooperate as described above to turn the front pas-senger air bag OFF for specified child restraints asrequired by the regulations. Failing to properlysecure child restraints and to use the ALR modemay allow the restraint to tip or move in an accidentor sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of beingOFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint is

installed properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meters and gaugesarea of the the instrument panel, will blink. Havethe system checked by a NISSAN dealer.


Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pattern sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

● Work on and around the front air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring should not bemodified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the front air bag systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.


Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact androllover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-over air bags are located in the side roof rails.These systems are designed to meet voluntaryguidelines to help reduce the risk of injury toout-of-position occupants. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bagsare designed to inflate in higher severity side

collisions, although they may inflate if the forcesin another type of collision are similar to those ofa higher severity side impact. They are designedto inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-pacted. They may not inflate in certain side colli-sions.

Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed toinflate in certain types of rollover collisions or nearrollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements(for example, during severe off roading) maycause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain androllover air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain and rolloversupplemental air bags inflate, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by release of smoke. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest ofthe front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bagshelp to cushion the impact force to the head ofoccupants in the front and rear outboard seatingpositions. They can help save lives and reduceserious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag

or curtain and rollover air bag may cause abra-sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtainand rollover air bags do not provide restraint tothe lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away aspractical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover airbags inflate quickly in order to help protect theoccupants. Because of this, the force of the sideair bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflatingcan increase the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, these air bag modulesduring inflation. The side air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The curtain and rollover air bags will remain in-flated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain and rolloverair bags operate only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

LRS0592


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain and rolloverair bag systems. This is to prevent dam-age to or accidental inflation of the sideair bag and curtain and rollover air bagsystems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thecurtain and rollover air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the frontseats by placing material near the seat-backs or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain and rollover air bag systemsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.Installation of electrical equipmentshould also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag or cur-tain and rollover air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors areyellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain and rollover air bag systems and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-ter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but a pretensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioners. Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.


● If you need to dispose of a pretensioneror scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunctionwith the front air bag system. The pretensionersystem also activates with the curtain and rolloverair bags in certain types of rollover collisions ornear rollovers. Working with the seat belt retrac-tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehiclebecomes involved in certain types of collisions,helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same wayas conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allowthe seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-tem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition switch has been placed in theON or START position. In this case, the preten-sioner system may not function properly. Theymust be checked and repaired. Take your vehicleto the nearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle asshown in the illustration.

WRS0885


SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impactair bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impactand rollover supplemental air bag and seat beltpretensioner systems. The monitored circuits in-clude the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zonesensor, satellite sensors, rollover sensor, occu-pant classification sensor, front air bag modules,side air bag modules, curtain and rollover air bagmodules, pretensioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand pretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensionersystems may not operate properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand/or pretensioner systems will not op-erate in an accident. To help avoid injuryto yourself or others, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain androllover air bags and pretensioners are designedto inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bagwarning light remains illuminated after inflationhas occurred. Repair and replacement of thesesupplemental air bag systems should be doneonly by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain androllover air bags, pretensioners and related partsshould be pointed out to the person performingthe maintenance. The ignition switch should al-ways be in the LOCK position when workingunder the hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100


WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain and rollover air bag has inflated,the air bag module will not functionagain and must be replaced. Addition-ally, if any of the front air bags inflate,the activated pretensioners must alsobe replaced. The air bag module andpretensioner should be replaced by aNISSAN dealer. The air bag module andpretensioner cannot be repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainand rollover air bag systems and thepretensioner system should be in-spected by a NISSAN dealer if there isany damage to the front end or sideportion of the vehicle.

● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap thevehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-rect disposal procedures could causepersonal injury.


MEMO


2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-12Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-27Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Off road lamps switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch . . . . . . . . . 2-31Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) systemswitch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Sunglasses holder (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Seat pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Cargo area storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

1. Vents (P. 4-2)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-26)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped)/Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped)(P. 4-35, P. 4-37)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-44, P. 2-30)

5. Meters, gauges and warning/indicatorlights (P. 2-3, 2-12)

6. Cruise control main/set switches(P. 5-18)

7. Windshield wiper/washer switch andrear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-24, P. 2-25)

8. Storage (P. 2-35)9. Audio system controls (P. 4-17)10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-44)11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-36)12. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-53)13. Auxiliary audio input jack

(if so equipped) (P. 4-33)14. Power outlet (P. 2-34)

WIC1447

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

15. Electronic locking rear differential(E-Lock) system switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-32)Hill descent control switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-31)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P. 2-31)

16. Shift selector (P. 5-12)17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-21)18. Climate controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-9)19. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-30)20. Ignition switch (P. 5-9)21. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-12)22. Off road lamps switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-29)23. Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-33)24. Power outside mirror controls

(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details. 1. Warning/indicator lights

2. Tachometer3. Speedometer4. Fuel gauge5. Voltmeter

6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Trip com-puter (if so equipped)

7. Engine oil pressure gauge8. Engine coolant temperature gauge

WIC0911

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Speedometer2. Odometer3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometerThe odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer,pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Trip

WIC0912With twin trip odometer

LIC0780


For vehicles equipped with trip computer, push-ing the change button changes the display asfollows:

Trip → Trip → Distance to Empty →Average speed → Average fuel consumption →Journey time → Trip

For additional information, refer to “Trip com-puter” later in this section.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the currently displayed trip odometerto zero.

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

The display of the trip computer is situated in thespeedometer display. When the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position, the display scrolls allthe modes of the trip computer and then showsthe mode chosen before the ignition switch wasplaced in the OFF position.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, modes of the trip computer can beselected by pushing the trip computer changebutton. The following modes can be selected:

Distance to empty (dte—mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The dte is constantly be-ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in thefuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warningfeature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode isautomatically selected and the digits blink in or-der to draw the driver’s attention. Press thechange button if you wish to return to the modethat was selected before the warning occurred.The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until thevehicle is refueled.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dtedisplay will change to (----).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while theignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-play just before the ignition switch isturned OFF may continue to be dis-played.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves,the fuel in the tank shifts, which maymomentarily change the display.

Average speed (MPH or km/h)The average speed mode shows the averagevehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is doneby pressing the change button for more thanapproximately 1 second. The display is updatedevery 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after areset, the display shows (----).

With trip computerLIC0781


Average fuel consumption (Mpg orl/100km)The average fuel consumption mode shows theaverage fuel consumption since the last reset.Resetting is done by pressing the change buttonfor more than approximately 1 second. The dis-play is updated every 30 seconds. At about thefirst 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the displayshows (----).

Journey timeThe journey time mode shows the time since thelast reset. The displayed time can be reset bypressing the change button for more than ap-proximately 1 second.

Trip computer resetPushing the change button for more than 3 sec-onds will reset all modes except Trip A and dis-tance to empty (dte).

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone �1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-gine speed. Operating the engine in thered zone may cause serious enginedamage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range �1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC0738 LIC0739


CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” later inthis section.

LIC0740


ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGEThe gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys-tem oil pressure while the engine is running. Theneedle should be in the middle of the gauge whenthe engine is running.

CAUTION

● This gauge is not designed to indicatelow engine oil level. Use the dipstick tocheck the oil level. (See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.)

● If the gauge needle does not move withthe proper amount of engine oil, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer. Continued vehicle operation insuch a condition could cause seriousdamage to the engine.

VOLTMETERWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt-age. When the engine is running, it indicates thegenerator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop belowthe normal range. If the needle is not in the normalrange (11 – 15 volts) �1 while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the charging systemis not functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

LIC0741 WIC1299


This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-dicates heading direction of vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressthe button as described in the fallowingchart to activate various features of the automaticanti-glare rearview mirror.

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 secondsAutomatic anti-glare/indicator lighttoggles on/off

11 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For more information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rear-view mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-justments” section.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the button for about 1 second whenthe ignition key is in the ON position to toggle theoutside temperature and compass direction dis-play �1 on or off. The display will indicate thedirection of the vehicle’s heading.

N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the “CAL” or “C” icon is illuminated in thecompass display, calibrate the compass by driv-ing the vehicle in three complete circles at lessthan 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.

WIC0904

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)


Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about11 seconds. The current zone number willappear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to togglethrough the zone numbers until the desirednumber appears in the display. Once youhave selected a zone number, the displaywill show a compass direction within a fewseconds.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the correct direction is notshown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and holdthe button for about 13 seconds. The“CAL” icon in the compass display will illu-minate.WIC0355


2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehiclein three complete circles at a maximumspeed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the displayshould return to normal.

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.


or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Hill descent control system on indicator light (ifso equipped)

Automatic transmission oil temperature warninglight (if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warning light( model)

Supplemental air bag warning light Overdrive OFF indicator light (A/T models only)

or Brake warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light(A/T models only)

Security indicator light

Charge warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light( model)

Engine oil pressure warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-tem on indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

4WD warning light ( model) 4WD shift indicator light ( model) Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF indicator light

Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS


CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , , , ,

,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatean open circuit in the electrical system.Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicatethe ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

Automatic transmission oiltemperature warning light (if soequipped)

This light comes on when the automatic transmis-sion oil temperature is too high. If the light comeson while driving, reduce the vehicle speed assoon as safely possible until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the A/Toil temperature warning light is on maydamage the automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission parkwarning light ( model)

WARNING

● If the ATP light is ON, this indicates thatthe automatic transmission P (Park) po-sition will not function and the transfercase is in neutral.

● When parking, always make sure thatthe 4WD shift indicator light illuminatesand the parking brake is set. Failure toengage the transfer position in 2WD, 4Hor 4LO could result in the vehicle mov-ing unexpectedly, resulting in seriouspersonal injury or property damage.

● Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4Hor 4LO position again to turn off the ATPwarning light when the shift selector isin the P position and the ATP warninglight is ON. (Before shifting the 4WDswitch into the 4LO position, move theshift selector into the N position once,shift the shift selector into P again andmake sure the ATP warning light isOFF.)


This light indicates that the automatic transmis-sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans-fer control is not secured in any drive positionwhile the shift selector is in the P (Park) position,the transmission will disengage and the drivewheels will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is runningwith the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely. Refer to “Variablevoltage control system” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section laterin this manual.

● Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.


The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

4WD warning light (model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon afterthe engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,the warning light will either remain illuminated orblink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Startingand driving” section.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksduring operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WDwarning light turns on when you aredriving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for automatictransmission models, stop the ve-hicle and shift the shift selector tothe N position with the brake pedaldepressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for manual trans-mission models, stop the vehicle andshift the shift selector to the N posi-tion with the clutch pedal depressedand shift the 4WD shift switch to2WD,

● If the warning light is still on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjust thetire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label located


in the driver’s door opening. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving”section and in the “In case of emergency”section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position. The light will remain onafter the 1 minute. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, have the vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifthe light still comes on while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.


Low windshield washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’sseat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chimesounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bagand pretensioners need servicing and your ve-hicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint systems (air bag system) and/or thepretensioners may not function properly. For ad-ditional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bags, curtain and rollover air bagsand/or pretensioners will not operate inan accident. To help avoid injury to your-self or others, have your vehicle checkedby a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light (A/Tmodels only)

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,this indicator light shows the shift selector posi-tion. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.


Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Electronic locking reardifferential (E-Lock) system onindicator light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the electronic lockingrear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fullyengaged.

The indicator light flashes when the system is firstturned on. When the system fully engages, thelight remains on. If the switch is on and theindicator light continues to flash, the system isnot engaged.

For additional information, see “Electronic lock-ing rear differential (E-Lock) system switch” laterin this section and “Electronic locking rear differ-ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

4WD shift indicator light( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterplacing the ignition switch in the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode to theother.

Front passenger air bag statuslight

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system onindicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light comes on briefly and then turnsoff.

The light comes on when the hill descent controlsystem is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on and theindicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.

If the indicator light does not come on or blinkwhen the hill descent switch is on, the systemmay not be functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Hill descent con-trol switch” later in this section and “Hill descentcontrol system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.


Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also comeon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to makesure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. Ifthe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the light does notturn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Youdo not need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.

● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Overdrive OFF indicator light(A/T models only)

This light comes on when the overdrive functionis OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive function iscontrolled by the overdrive switch.

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.


This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This functionindicates the security system equipped on thevehicle is operational.


For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if the slip indicatorblinks on. If this happens, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youplace the ignition switch in the ON position. Thelight will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light does not comeon or does not go off, have the traction controlsystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac-tion control system is disabled and the slip indi-cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position.To reset the system, you must perform the resetprocedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing thereset procedure, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Transfer 4LO position indicatorlight ( model)

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to ON.

This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch isset in the 4LO position with the ignition switch inthe ON position.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shift theswitch while driving.

Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicatorlight turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switchto 4LO.

The indicator light may blink while shiftingfrom one drive mode to the other.

The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking andremain illuminated or turn off before shifting thetransmission into gear. If the shift selector isshifted from the N (Neutral) position to any othergear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, thevehicle may move unexpectedly.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow theinstructions below:

● For automatic transmission models, stop thevehicle and shift the shift selector to the N(Neutral) position with the brake pedal de-pressed, then depress and turn the 4WDshift switch to 4LO or 4H.

● For manual transmission models, stop thevehicle and shift the shift selector to the N(Neutral) position with the clutch pedal de-pressed, then depress and turn the 4WDshift switch to 4LO or 4H.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switchbetween 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicleand shift the shift selector to the N position withthe brake pedal (AT models) or clutch pedal (MTmodels) depressed.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.


Vehicle Dynamic Control OFFindicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VehicleDynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, thetransfer case is in the 4LO position (model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Controlsystem is not functioning properly. This indicatesthe Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper-ating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switchagain or restart the engine and the system willoperate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes onwhen you turn the ignition key to the ON position.The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light stays on orcomes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the Vehicle DynamicControl system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the Ve-hicle Dynamic Control system is disabled and theVDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec-onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition. To reset the system, you must performthe reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing thereset procedure, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system isoperating, you might feel slight vibration or hearthe system working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

The VDC system will be disabled and the VDClight will illuminate when the electronic lockingrear differential (E-lock) system switch (if soequipped) is turned on and the E-lock system isengaged. If the E-lock system disengages or theswitch is turned off, the VDC system will beenabled and the VDC light will turn off.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.


Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with the key, power door lockswitch (if the door is opened, locked andthen closed), or with the keyfob.

Keyfob operation:

● Push the button on the keyfob.All doors lock. The hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once to indicateall doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’sdoor is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, orthe ignition switch is placed in ACC or ONposition, the system will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

LIC0372

SECURITY SYSTEMS


● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition switch placed in theOFF position.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockingthe driver’s door with the key or by pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key orkeyfob (even if the door is unlocked by usingthe inside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor or the liftgate with the key or by pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The alarm does not stop if the ignitionswitch is turned to ACC or ON.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ONposition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.



The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

�1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob toward�A (Slower) or �B (Faster).

�2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

�3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up �4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you �5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

LIC0474 WIC0843

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH


● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF positionto operate the wiper.

�1 Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation(not adjustable)

�2 ON – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward �3 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the window and ob-scure your vision. Warm the rear windowwith the defroster before you wash therear window.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.



WIC0844

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH


To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light comes on.Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

�1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

�2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

Type ALIC0783

Type BLIC1419

Type ALIC0706

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH


CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Headlight beam select

�1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

�2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

�3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFF positionwhile the headlight switch is in theor position, the headlights will turn off after5 minutes.

After the headlights automatically turn off with the

headlight switch in the or position,the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes ifthe headlight switch is moved to the OFF position

and then turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

Type BLIC0688 WIC0859


If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in the ,or position.

Turn the control �A to adjust the brightness ofinstrument panel lights when driving at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

�1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

�2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

WIC0917 WIC0860


FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

OFF ROAD LAMPS SWITCH (if soequipped)The off road lights are designed to increase vis-ibility when driving during off road conditions. Toturn on the off road lights:

● The covers must be removed from the offroad lights.

● The headlights must be set to the high beamfunction.

● Press the off road lamps switch.

To turn the off road lights off, press the off roadlamps switch again. If the high beam function ofthe headlights is turned off at any time, the offroad lights will turn off as well. If the high beamfunction is turned back on, the off road lampsswitch needs to be pressed again with the coversstill removed in order to turn on the off road lights.

The covers should remain on the off road lightswhen the lights are not in use.

WIC0861 LIC1448


Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To sound the horn, push the area between thehorn icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

LIC0394 WIC1449

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH

HORN


The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engineto turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● Never rely solely on the hill descentcontrol system to control vehicle speedwhen driving on steep downhill grades.Always drive carefully when using thehill descent control system and decel-erate the vehicle speed by depressingthe brake pedal if necessary. Be espe-cially careful when driving on frozen,muddy or extremely steep downhillroads. Failure to control vehicle speedmay result in a loss of control of thevehicle and possible serious injury ordeath.

● The hill descent control may not controlthe vehicle speed on a hill under all loador road conditions. Always be preparedto depress the brake pedal to controlvehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-sult in a collision or serious personalinjury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system op-erates continuously for a long time, thetemperature of the brake pads may in-crease and the hill descent control systemmay be temporarily disabled (the indicatorlight will blink). If the indicator light doesnot come on continuously after blinking,stop using the system.

The hill descent control system is designed toreduce driver workload when going down steephills. The hill descent control system helps tocontrol vehicle speed so the driver can concen-trate on steering the vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

● the 4WD switch must be in the 4L positionand the vehicle speed must be under 15mph (25 km/h) or

WIC0534 LIC0743

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (ifso equipped)


● the 4WD switch must be in the 4H positionand the vehicle speed must be under 21mph (35 km/h), and

● the hill descent control system switch mustbe ON.

The hill descent control system on indicator lightwill come on when the system is activated. Also,the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descentcontrol system applies the brakes to control ve-hicle speed.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressedwhile the hill descent control system is on, thesystem will stop operating temporarily. As soonas the accelerator or brake pedal is released, thehill descent control system begins to functionagain if the hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control system on indicator lightblinks if the switch is on and all conditions forsystem activation are not met or if the systembecomes disengaged for any reason.

To turn off the hill descent control system, pushthe switch to the OFF position.

For additional information, see “Hill descent con-trol system on indicator light” earlier in this sec-tion and “Hill descent control system” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock)system can help provide added traction if thevehicle is stuck or becoming stuck.

To activate the E-Lock system:

● the 4WD switch must be in the 4LO position(4-wheel drive vehicles),

● the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4mph (7 km/h) or less, and

● the E-Lock system switch must be turnedON.

When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indi-cator light will flash until the system engages.However, if all operation conditions listed aboveare not met or the system becomes disengaged,the indicator light will continue to flash.

The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabledand the ABS light illuminates when the E-Locksystem is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC lightilluminates when the E-Lock system is ON.

See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system” in the “Starting and Driving” section forfurther explanation and system limitations.

WARNING

● Never leave the E-Lock system ONwhen driving on paved or hard-surfacedroads. Turning the vehicle may result inthe rear wheels slipping and result in anaccident and personal injury. After us-ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-hicle, turn the system OFF.

LIC0729

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEMSWITCH (if so equipped)


● Use the E-Lock system only when free-ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO positionbefore using the E-Lock system. Neveruse the E-Lock system on a slipperyroad surface such as snow or ice sur-face. Using the E-Lock system whendriving in these road conditions maycause unexpected movement of the ve-hicle during engine braking, accelerat-ing or turning, which may result in anaccident and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

● After using the E-Lock system, turn theswitch OFF to prevent possible damageto driveline components from extendeduse.

● Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h)when the system is engaged. Doing socould result in possible damage to thedriveline.

● Do not turn on the E-lock system whilethe tires are spinning. Doing so coulddamage drivetrain components.

WARNING

Pay special attention to your surround-ings when using the clutch interlockswitch. The vehicle will move forward orbackward according to the gear selected.

The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch allowsfor starting the engine without depressing theclutch pedal. This feature helps you restart theengine if it stops under difficult conditions. (Forexample, the engine stops on a steep hill and aslight movement forward or backward might bedangerous.)

To use the clutch interlock switch:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Depress the brake pedal with your right foot.

3. Place your left foot on the brake pedal andrelease the parking brake.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

5. Press and release the clutch interlockswitch. The CANCEL light on the switch willilluminate.

6. Turn the ignition to the START position tostart the engine and, at the same time, de-press the accelerator pedal with your rightfoot. As the vehicle begins to move, takeyour left foot off the brake. Once the enginehas started, the clutch interlock switchCANCEL light shuts off. Do not use theinterlock switch to start the engine undernormal driving conditions.

WIC0817

CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start)SWITCH (if so equipped)


The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

The power outlet located on the instrument paneland the power outlet located in the cargo area arepowered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. See your NISSANdealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

Front rowWIC1420

Center consoleLIC0761

Luggage areaLIC0862

POWER OUTLET


STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays tohelp prevent injury in an accident or sud-den stop.

Top center trayLIC1539

AT model (if so equipped)LIC0818

MT model (if so equipped)WIC1421

STORAGE


CONSOLE BOXPull up on the lever �1 to open the console box lid�2 .

GLOVE BOXTo open the top portion of the glove box, push thelatch �A up and raise the lid.

To open the lower portion of the glove box, pullthe handle �B down and lower the lid.

Use the master key to lock or unlock the glovebox. The valet key cannot be used to lock orunlock the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if soequipped)To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

● Keep the sunglasses holder closedwhile driving to prevent an accident.

LIC0766 LIC0768 WIC0609


CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

MAP POCKETS SEAT POCKETS (if so equipped)A pocket is located on the back of the driver’sseat.

LIC0863 LIC0575


CUP HOLDERSThe front cup holders have adapters that can beremoved to accommodate larger cups.

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the frontconsole), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid. Ifstepped on, the cup holder is designed to snaploose from the console. To re-install, close thecup holder assembly and push it back into theconsole opening.

To fold the 2nd row bench seat back, first closethe cup holder.

CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

FrontWIC0827

2nd row (rear of front console)WIC0771

Bottle holderLIC0864


CARGO AREA STORAGETo access the floor storage area, push down �1

to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle �2

to lift the luggage board.

WARNING

Do not drive with the luggage board teth-ered to a ceiling hook. In a sudden stop orcollision, the luggage board could comeloose and cause personal injury.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargowith ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● Use suitable ropes and hooks to securecargo.

● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-gage area. It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts.

● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top tether strap is damaged.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a seat belt properly.

WIC1519


Side finisherDo not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)to a single hook.

Floor hooksDo not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N)to a single hook.

LTI0140 LTI0141


CARGO NETS

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

● Be sure to secure all four hooks into theretainers. The cargo restrained in thenet must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) orthe net may not stay secured.

The cargo nets help keep packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicle is inmotion.

To install the large cargo net (if so equipped),attach the hooks to the retainers.

To remove the large cargo net, detach the hooksfrom the cargo net retainers.

The right-hand luggage side net is not removable.

WARNING

● The cargo restrained in the luggageside nets must not exceed 8.5 lb (3.9 kg)for each net or the net may not staysecured.

● Do not place sharp objects in the lug-gage side nets. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles and causeinjury when the vehicle is moving or ifthe vehicle is involved in a collision.

Cargo net (if so equipped)LIC0876

Right-hand luggage side netLIC0866


To install the removable left-hand luggage sidenet �A , attach the net to the retainers. To remove,detach the net from the retainers.

The smaller left-hand luggage side net is notremovable.

Left-hand luggage side netsLIC0867

WIC0868


ROOF RACK

WARNING

● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle isloaded at or near the cargo carryingcapacity, especially if the significantportion of that load is carried on theroof rack.

● Heavy loading of the roof rack has thepotential to affect the vehicle stabilityand handling during sudden or abnor-mal handling maneuvers.

● Roof rack load should be evenlydistributed.

● Do not exceed maximum roof rack loadweight capacity.


CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing itemsfrom the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-ably lift the items onto the roof rack fromthe ground, use a ladder or stool.

Always evenly distribute the cargo on the roofrack. The maximum total load including thegear basket is 150 lb (68 kg) evenly distrib-uted. The maximum total load for the gearbasket is 30 lb (13 kg) evenly distributed. Becareful that your vehicle does not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR front andrear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s side doorjamb pillar). For more information regardingGVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loadinginformation” in the “Technical and consumer in-formation” section later in this manual.

The crossbars (if so equipped) can be adjustedor removed. Use the Torxdriver provided in thetool kit (located under the 2nd row seats) toloosen both crossbar adjusting screws.

To adjust:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with theTorxdriver �1 by turning counterclockwise�A .

2. When the clamp is loosened, move thecrossbar so the cargo can be positioned onthe crossbar �B .

3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws withthe Torxdriver by turning clockwise.

4. Secure the cargo with rope.

5. Always check the tightness of the crossbaradjusting screws.

To remove:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with theTorxdriver �1 by turning counterclockwise�A .

2. Rotate the clamps �C .

3. Remove the crossbar.

4. Reverse to install.

5. Always check the tightness of the crossbaradjusting screws.


To open the gear basket lid:

�1 Turn the handle counterclockwise.

�2 Raise the lid.

NOTE:

Cargo in the gear basket must fit with thelid closed. The maximum total load for thegear basket is 30 lb (13 kg) evenly distrib-uted. Do not force the lid closed.

WARNING

The lid should be closed and locked whendriving.

To remove the gear basket assembly:

1. Open the lid.

2. Loosen the 4 Torx� head fasteners with aTorxdriver by turning counterclockwise �A .

3. Lift the gear basket to remove it �B .

4. Reverse to reinstall.

5. Always check the tightness of the gear bas-ket fasteners.

Gear basket (if so equipped)LIC0869

Gear basket (if so equipped)LIC0870


POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, or for about45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger’s side window switch4. Right rear passenger’s window switch5. Left rear passenger’s window switch6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close the front and rearpassenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold itdown. To close a window, pull the switch andhold it up. To stop the opening or closing functionat any time, simply release the switch.

WIC1100

WINDOWS


Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down �1 .To close the window, pull the switch up �2 .

Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down �1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up �2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operationTo fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down to thesecond detent and release it; it need not be held.The window automatically opens all the way. Tostop the window, lift the switch up while thewindow is opening.

WIC0343 WIC0874 LIC0410


The interior lights have a three-position switchand operate regardless of ignition switch posi-tion.

When the switch is in the ON position �1 , theinterior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi-tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutesunless the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

When the switch is in the ON position �2 , theinterior lights will stay on for about 30 secondswhen:

● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key,or the power door lock switch while all doorsare closed and the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer isactivated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-sition.

The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-utes while doors are open to prevent the batteryfrom becoming discharged.

When the switch is in the OFF position �3 , theinterior lights do not illuminate, regardless of doorposition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

Type ALIC0792

Type BWIC0879

INTERIOR LIGHTS


To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-position switch. To operate, push the switch tothe desired position.

ON: The light is illuminated.

Normal (center) position: The light illuminateswhen the lift gate is opened. The light turns offwhen the lift gate is closed.

OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless ofdoor position or lock status.

LIC0790 LIC0590

MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT


3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Opening the fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip3. Key number plate4. Transponder chipA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

WPD0128

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the doors are locked using one of thefollowing methods, the doors can not be openedusing the inside or outside door handles. Thedoors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front �1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear �2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral �3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors �4 .

Opening windows (if so equipped)The driver’s door key operation allows you toopen windows equipped with automatic opera-tion at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the door keytoward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

The door windows cannot be closed by thedriver’s door key.

Driver’s sideLPD0240

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position �1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position �2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver or front passenger side), to thelock position �1 , then close the door. Whenlocking the door this way, be certain not to leavethe key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver or front passenger side)to the unlock position �2 .

When the power door lock switch (driver or pas-senger side) is moved to the lock position withthe key in the ignition and any door open, all doorswill lock and then unlock automatically.

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition switch and anydoor open, all doors will lock and then unlockautomatically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All doors unlock automatically when the keyis removed from the ignition switch.

The automatic lock and unlock functionscan be deactivated or activated indepen-dently of each other. To deactivate or activatethe automatic door lock or unlock system, per-form the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

Inside lockLPD0320

Driver’s sideWPD0381


3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds ofperforming Step #2:

● To change AUTO UNLOCK settings:push and hold the power door lock switchto the position (UNLOCK) for morethan 5 seconds.

● To change AUTO LOCK settings: pushand hold the power door lock switch tothe position (LOCK) for morethan 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard warning lightswill flash twice. When deactivated, the haz-ard warning lights will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in theOFF and ON position again between eachsetting change.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-mits radio waves when the buttons arepushed. The FAA advises radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communica-tion systems. Do not operate the remotekeyless entry keyfob while on an airplane.Make sure the buttons are not operatedunintentionally when the unit is stored fora flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn theinterior light on, and activate the panic alarm byusing the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effectivedistance depends upon the conditions aroundthe vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

WPD0321

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM


The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob, which containselectrical components, to come intocontact with water or salt water. Thiscould affect the system function.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not change or modify the keyfob.

● Wetting may damage the keyfob. If thekeyfob gets wet, immediately wipe untilit is completely dry.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the keyfob with a keyholder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the keyfob near equip-ment that produces a magnetic field,such as a TV, audio equipment and per-sonal computers.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Press the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once toindicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209


● When the button is pressed withall doors locked, the hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once as areminder that the doors are alreadylocked.

● If a door is open and you pressthe button, the doors will lockbut the horn will not beep and the hazardlights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Silenc-ing the horn beep feature” in this section fordetails.

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed with the ignitionswitch in any position except the ON posi-tion.

● The interior lights illuminate for 30 secondswhen the interior light switch is in the normaloperation position.

Press the button on the keyfob againwithin 5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard warning lights flash once if alldoors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait-ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into theignition switch and placing the ignition switch inthe ON or START position, locking the doors withthe keyfob or pushing the interior light switch tothe OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pressed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

LPD0210


Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pressing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pressed on the keyfob.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the keyfob once toturn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior lights”in the “Instruments and controls” section in thismanual.

LPD0211 LPD0262


�1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver’s side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

�2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

�3 Insert the support rod into the slot on theunderside of the hood.

When closing the hood, return the hood rod to itsoriginal position. Lower the hood approximately12 inch (30 cm) above the latch and release it.This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the lift gate.

LPD0302

HOOD LIFT GATE


The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors including the lift gate simulta-neously.

To open the lift gate, pull up on the handle.

To close, lower and push the lift gate down se-curely.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER LIDPull the lid to open.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder �1 whilerefueling.

LPD0322 LPD0460 LPD0323

FUEL-FILLER DOOR


WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into thefuel-filler tube, then tighten until thefuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tightenthe fuel-filler cap properly may cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate. If the light

illuminates because the fuel-filler capis loose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionin this manual.


TILT OPERATION

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust thesteering wheel up or down to the desired posi-tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheelin place.

�1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

�2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

�3 Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)in or out as needed.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing the extension to its originalposition.

● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-edly downward.

LPD0304

WPD0315

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS


VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

REARVIEW MIRRORThe night position �1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position �2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

WPD0307 WPD0126

MIRRORS


The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally dims according to the intensity of the head-lights of the vehicle following you. The automaticanti-glare feature is activated when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors�1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of thesensors, resulting in improper operation.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-matic anti-glare feature is operating.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressthe button as described:

● To turn off the anti-glare feature, pressthe button. The indicator light will turnoff.

● To turn on the anti-glare feature, pressthe button again. The indicator lightwill turn on.

For more information about the �2 compass andcompass features (if so equipped), refer to“Compass display” in the “Instruments and con-trols” section of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

Manual control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror can be moved in any directionfor a better rear view.

LPD0446 WPD0170


Electric control type (if so equipped)The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is placed in theACC or ON position.

Move the small switch �1 to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch �2 .

Heated mirrors (Canada only) (if soequipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

Foldable outside mirrorsPull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

LPD0237 LPD0259


MEMO


4 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phonesystems

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type A). . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Heater and air conditioner (manual) (Type B). . . . . . . . . . 4-9Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-18Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player(Type A and B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48Manual Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s side vents�1 , center vents �2 , and passenger’s side vents�3 by moving the vent slide and/or vent assem-blies.

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

WHA1165

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (Type A)

4-2 Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. Fan control dial2. Temperature control dial3. Air flow control dial4. Air conditioner button5. Rear window defroster button6. Air recirculation button

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control dial

The air flow control dial allows you to select theair flow outlets.

MAX A/C — Air flows from center andside vents with maximumcooling (air conditioning ifso equipped).

— Air flows from center andside vents.

— Air flows from center andside vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from footoutlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from de-froster outlets.

● When the , or position isselected, the air recirculation modecannot be turned on. This prevents the win-dows from fogging.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

Type ALHA0489

Heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

OFF position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired (1 to 4) position and push thebutton to turn on the air conditioner. The indicatorlight on the button will come on. Pushthe button again to turn off the air condi-tioner. The indicator light on the button willgo off.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switchFor more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATIONHeating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating. The indicator light onthe button will go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to theposition.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter vent.

1. Push the button to the OFF position.The indicator light on the button willgo off.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.




● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and thetemperature control lever to the full HOTposition.


● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light will not illuminate) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). If the system is in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fancontrol dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle isshut off, even if the air flow control dial isturned to a position other than theposition. This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Bi-level heatingThe bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.

1. Push the button to the OFF position.The indicator light on the button willgo off.




Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on) if the outside temperature ismore than 36°F (2°C). If the air flow controldial is in the position for more thanone minute, the air conditioning system willcontinue to operate until the fan control dialis turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off,even if the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than the position. Thisdehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.



Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the off position.



4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe on position (indicator light on). Be sureto return the button to the off positionfor normal cooling.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.



3. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.

When the air flow control dial is in theor position, the air conditioner automati-cally turns on (however, the indicator light will notilluminate) if the outside temperature is more than36°F (2°C). If one of these positions is selectedfor more than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fan con-trol dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off,even if the air flow control dial is turned to aposition other than these positions. This dehu-midifies the air which helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to further improve the defogging perfor-mance.


Operating tips

● Keep the windows closed while the air con-ditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting.


WHA0775 WHA0776


WHA0777 WHA0778


WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

WHA1074

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (Type B)


1. Fan speed control dial2. Front window defroster button3. Rear window defroster button4. Air recirculation button5. Temperature control dial6. MAX A/C button7. Air flow control buttons8. Air conditioner button

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to selectthe air flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling(air conditioning).

— Air flows from center and sidevents.

— Air flows from center and sidevents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from footoutlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from defrosteroutlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

Type BWHA1406


OFF position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. The indicator lightcomes on when the air conditioner is operating.To turn off the air conditioner, push thebutton again.


Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

HeatingThis mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating. The indicator light onthe button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.



Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.The indicator light on the button willgo off.




Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .



● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to the highestsetting and the temperature control to thefull HOT position.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on) if the outside temperature ismore than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fancontrol dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle isshut off, or the A/C button is used to turn offthe compressor even if the air flow controldial is turned to a position other thanthe position. This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, al-lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-senger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance.


Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.The indicator light on the button willgo off.




Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on) if the outside temperature ismore than 36°F (2°C). If the air flowcontrol button is selected for more than oneminute, the air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or theA/C button is used to turn off the compres-sor even if the air flow control dial is turned toa position other than the position.This dehumidifies the air which helps defogthe windshield. The mode automati-cally turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.


CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.



4. Press the button. The indicator lighton the button will come on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe ON position. The indicator light onthe button will come on. Be sure toreturn the to the OFF position for nor-mal cooling. The indicator light on thebutton will go off. You may also select MAXA/C for quick cooling.


Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.



3. Press the button. The indicator lightcomes on.

When the or positions are se-lected, the air conditioner automatically turns on(however, the indicator light will not illuminate) ifthe outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).If one of these air flow control buttons is selectedfor more than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fan con-trol dial is turned to OFF, the air conditioner isturned OFF, or the vehicle is shut off, even if aposition other than these positions is selected.This dehumidifies the air which helps defog thewindshield. The mode automatically turnsoff, allowing outside air to be drawn into thepassenger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance.


Operating tips● Keep the windows closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling, see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section. The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting.


WHA0916 WHA0917


WHA0918 WHA0919


The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

WHA1362

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER


RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and press the PWR (power)/VOL (vol-ume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to theradio with the engine not running, the ignitionswitch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FMhaving slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMstation reception even if the FM station is within25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance between thetransmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-acteristics as light. For example, they will reflectoff objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter), static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO SYSTEM


SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is used for the first timeor the battery has been replaced, the satelliteradio may not work properly. This is not a mal-function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satelliteradio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal orlarge building for satellite radio to receive all ofthe necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XM� satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio canonly be installed in vehicles that were factorypre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna canaffect satellite radio performance. Remove theice to restore satellite radio reception.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

LHA0099


● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA (ifso equipped)

Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio withvirtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Mi-crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.


● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, encoding bitrate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-mation is displayed on the Artist/song titleline on the display.

* Windows� and Windows Media� are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks in the UnitedStates of America and other countries of Mi-crosoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMAfiles is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chartWHA1078


Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*201: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.


Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters forfolder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, therewill be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.


1. PRESET A·B·C button2. CD eject button3. MENU button4. CD insert slot5. CD button

6. FM·AM button7. TUNE buttons8. RPT button9. PWR button/VOL control knob10. RDM button

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons12. SEEK buttons

Type AWHA1075


1. PRESET A·B·C button2. CD eject button3. FM·AM button4. CD insert slot5. CD button

6. MENU button7. TUNE button8. RPT button9. PWR button/VOL control knob10. RDM button

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons12. SEEK buttonFM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER (Type A and B) (ifso equipped)For all operation precautions, see �Audio opera-tion precautions� earlier in this section.

Audio main operationPower button and VOL control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, then press the PWR (power) button. Ifyou listen to the radio with the engine not running,place the ignition switch in the ACC position. Themode (radio or CD) that was playing immediatelybefore the system was turned off resumes play-ing.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pressing the PWR button again turns the systemoff.

Turn the VOL control knob to the right to increasevolume or to the left to decrease volume.Type B

WHA1167


MENU button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-ANCE and CLOCK):

Press the MENU button to change the mode asfollows:

BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK → Audio→ BAS

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe MENU button until the desired mode appearsin the display. Press the SEEK button to adjustBass and Treble to the desired level. You can alsouse the SEEK button to adjust Fade and Balancemodes. Fade adjusts the sound level between thefront and rear speakers and Balance adjusts thesound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the MENU button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

NOTE:

If the clock is enabled, pressing the MENUbutton will change the mode as follows:BAS → TRE → FAD → BAL → CLOCK →Hour adjustment → Minute adjustment →Audio → BAS

For more information on setting the clock, see“Clock set” later in this section.

Clock operation

Press the MENU button until CLOCK is dis-played; use the SEEK button to turn the clockdisplay on (CLK ON) or off (CLK OFF).

Clock set

If the clock is not displayed with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or ON position, you need toselect the CLK ON mode. Press the MENU but-ton repeatedly until CLOCK is displayed. Use theSEEK button to enable CLK ON mode.

1. Press the MENU button repeatedly untilCLOCK mode appears; press the SEEKbutton until CLK ON appears.

2. Press the MENU button again; the hours willstart flashing.

3. Press the SEEK button or toadjust the hour.

4. Press the MENU button again; the displaywill switch to the minute adjustment mode.

5. The minutes will start flashing. Press SEEK

button or to adjust the minutes.

6. Press the MENU button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 10 seconds, or press the MENU buttonagain to return to the regular clock display.

Resetting the time

Hold the MENU button down and then press theTUNE/SEEK button; the time will reset as fol-lows:

● If the displayed minutes before the reset arein the range of :00 - :29, the hour displayedbefore the reset will stay the same and theminutes will be reset to :00.

● If the displayed minutes before the reset arein the range of :30 - :59, the hour displayedbefore the reset will advance by one hourand the minutes will be reset to :00.

For example, if the MENU button and theTUNE/SEEK button are pressed while the timedisplayed is between 8:00 and 8:29, the displaywill be reset to 8:00. If the buttons were pressedwhile the time was between 8:30 and 8:59, thedisplay will be reset to 9:00. At the same time thedisplay will return to the audio.

FM/AM radio operationFM·AM button:

Press the FM·AM button to change from AM ←→FM reception.


The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE buttons:

Manual tuning

Press the TUNE or button for lessthan 0.5 seconds for manual tuning.

To move quickly through the channels, press and

hold either TUNE or button downfor more than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK buttons:

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK or button to seekthrough the frequencies. Seek tuning beginsfrom low to high frequencies, or high to lowfrequencies, depending on which button ispressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta-tion. Once the highest broadcasting station isreached, the radio continues in the seek mode atthe lowest broadcasting station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tothe A, B and C preset button in any combinationof AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manualTUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operationPlace the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and carefully insert the compact discinto the slot with the label side up. The compactdisc is automatically pulled into the slot and startsto play.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.

TUNE (rewind and fast

forward) buttons:

When the TUNE or button ispressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilerewinding or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

SEEK buttons:

When is pressed while the compact discis playing, the next track following the presentone starts to play from the beginning.Press several times to skip several tracks.Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-pears in the display window. (When the last trackon the compact disc is skipped, the first track isplayed.)


When is pressed, the track being playedreturns to the beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed, the CD moves back one track.

SEEK (Scan CDs) button:

Press and hold the SEEK button for morethan 1.5 seconds to scan through the first 10seconds of a track on the compact disc. TheSCAN icon is flashed during scan mode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans throughall the tracks on the disc, or if the SEEKor button is pressed during the scanmode.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

1 ←→ Normal

1: The track that is currently playing will be re-peated.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

RDM ←→ Normal

RDM: Tracks from the disc that is currently play-ing will be played randomly.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the compact discwill eject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when theCD is loaded with the system on.


1. PRESET A·B·C button2. Display screen3. DISP/CLOCK button4. SEEK/TRACK button5. CD button6. RADIO button*

7. AUX button8. SCAN RPT button9. CAT FOLDER button10. LOAD button11. CD insert slot

12. CD eject button13. VOL control knob and PWR button14. Station and CD select (1 – 6) buttons15. TUNE/TRACK knob and AUDIO button

*No satellite radio reception is availablewhen the RADIO button is pressed toaccess satellite radio stations unlessoptional satellite receiver and antennaare installed and an XM� satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satelliteradio can only be installed in vehiclesthat were factory pre-wired for satelliteradio. Satellite radio is not available inAlaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (ifso equipped)

For all operation precautions, see �Audio opera-tion precautions� earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radiostations unless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XM� satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio canonly be installed in vehicles that were factorypre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

WHA1172


Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON, and thenpress the PWR/VOL control knob while the sys-tem is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) whichwas playing immediately before the system wasturned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO control knob to change themode as follows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade andBalance, press the AUDIO knob until the desiredmode appears in the display. Turn the Tuningknob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjustFade and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock set

1. Press the DISP/CLOCK button until itbeeps (>1.5 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. Press the CAT

FOLDER or button or SEEK

TRACK or button to adjust thehours.

3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again toswitch to the minute adjustment.

4. Press the CAT FOLDER or

button or SEEK TRACK orbutton to adjust the minutes.

5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exitthe clock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 7 seconds, or you may press theDISP/CLOCK button again to return to the regu-lar clock display.

DISP (display) button:

This DISP (display) button will show text aboutMP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Disc title ←→ Track number ←→ Track title.

To change the default display mode, press theAUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODEappears on the display, then rotate the knob toselect the following display modes: Disc number←→ Folder number.

Once the display mode is selected, press theAUDIO knob again to store the setting. If theAUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds, thedisplay will refresh with the last selected displaymode setting.

● Track title mode displays the title of the se-lected CD track.

● Disc title mode displays the title of the CDbeing played.


● Track number mode displays the numberselected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played on the disk.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to anMP3/WMA CD with MP3/WMA text (when CDwith text is being used), press the DISP button.The DISP button will scroll through the CD text asfollows: File name ←→ Folder title ←→ Art-ist ←→ Disc number ←→ Folder number.

To change the default display mode, press theAUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODEappears on the display, then rotate the knob toselect the following display modes: File name←→ Folder title ←→ Artist ←→ Disc number←→ Folder number.

Once a display mode is selected, press the AU-DIO knob again to store the setting.

● Folder number mode displays the selectedfolder number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Disc number mode displays the selecteddisc number and the track number that iscurrently being played.

● Artist mode displays the artist title of theMP3/WMA file.

● File name mode displays the track title of theMP3/WMA file.

● Folder title mode displays the folder namegiven to the MP3 folder.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcast information as follows: Name ←→Title ←→ Current display mode.

To change the default display mode press theAUDIO button to display mode and press theTUNE button to select the following displaymodes: Channel number ←→ Channel name←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode isselected press the AUDIO button again to storethe setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressedafter 8 seconds the display will refresh with thelast selected display mode setting.

● Channel number mode displays the channelnumber of the selected satellite radio sta-tion.

● Channel name mode displays the channelname of the selected satellite radio station.

● Name mode displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Title mode displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pushing the RADIO button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO button is pushed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe PWR/VOL control knob is depressed to ON.

No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radiostations unless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XM� satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio canonly be installed in vehicles that were factorypre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satelliteradio is not operational then the RADIO button isused to toggle between AM and FM bands.


If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pushed, the compact disc will automati-cally be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

CAT FOLDER (tuning)

button:

To manually tune the radio, press the CAT

FOLDER button or or turn the tun-ing knob to right or left.

To move quickly through the channels, press and

hold either the or button down formore than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK/TRACK tuning

button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

To seek quickly through the channels, press andhold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5

seconds. When the button is released the radiowill seek to the next broadcasting station.

SCAN RPT tuning:

Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5seconds to stop at each broadcasting station(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.Pressing the button again during this 5 secondperiod will stop scan tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPTbutton is not pressed within 5 seconds, scantuning moves to the next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.


Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOADbutton.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing the PWR/VOLcontrol knob will start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discsin the CD changer.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the loadbutton for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pressing the CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press theload button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the compactdisc will start to play.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Pressseveral times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing,the next track will start to play from its beginning.Press several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of timesthe button is pressed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

CAT FOLDER button:

While playing a CD, press and hold the CAT

FOLDER button or to fast forwardor rewind a track on a CD.

MP3 CAT FOLDER button:

While playing an MP3 CD, press the CAT

FOLDER button or to scan back-ward or forward through available folders.

Press and hold the CAT FOLDER buttonor to fast forward or rewind a track on anMP3 CD.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

SCAN/RPT:

When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushedwhile the compact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT


ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadeddisc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is notremoved within 15 seconds, the disc willreload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 20 seconds or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while a compactdisc is playing, the compact disc will eject andthe last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.

AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack �1 is located above the poweroutlet. The AUX audio input jack accepts anystandard analog audio input such as from a por-table cassette tape player, MP3 player or a laptopcomputer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX jack.

WHA1168


CD CARE AND CLEANING

● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend thedisc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

LHA0049Type A

WHA1095


1. Volume control switch2. Phone operation switch3. Power on and MODE select switch4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

The audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switchIf you have the Type A switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe POWER switch to turn the audio system onor off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignitionswitch placed in the ACC or ON position, pushthe MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switchPush the mode select switch to change themodes:

PRESET A → PRESET B → PRESET C → CD*→ AUX** → PRESET A

*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.

**This mode is only available when a compatibleauxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

Volume control switchPush the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for lessthan 1.5 seconds to change to the next or previ-ous preset.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) formore than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-ous radio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the SEEK tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to change the playingdisc up or down.

Type BLHA1087


ANTENNAThe antenna cannot be shortened, but can beremoved. When you need to remove the antenna,turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clock-wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specificationusing a suitable tool such as an open-endwrench. The antenna rod tightening specificationis 2.0 – 2.6 N·m (18 – 23 in-lb). Do not use pliersto tighten the antenna as they can leave marks onthe antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot behand tightened to the proper specification.

CAUTION

Always properly tighten the antenna rodduring installation or the antenna rod maybreak during vehicle operation.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions; otherwise, the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not ground electrical accessoriesdirectly to the battery terminal. Doingso will bypass the variable voltage con-trol system and the vehicle battery maynot charge completely. Refer to “Vari-able voltage control system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion later in this manual.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO


WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-patible Bluetooth� enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With Bluetooth� wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connectingprocedure is required. Your phone is automaticallyconnected with the in-vehicle phone module when

WHA1359

BLUETOOTH� HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM (if so equipped)


the ignition switch is placed in the ON position withthe previously connected cellular phone turned onand carried in the vehicle.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth�cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some Bluetooth� enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe Bluetooth� wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.


BLUETOOTH� is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed toVisteon.

USING THE SYSTEMThe NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the Bluetooth� PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. If the button ispressed before the initialization completes, thesystem will announce “Hands-free phone systemnot ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commandsTo operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak acommand.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for 5 seconds at any time toend the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-sion is cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

● In most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel.


● To use the system faster, you may speak thesecond level commands with the main menucommand on the main menu. For example,press the button and after the tonesay, “Call Redial.”

NOTE:

The combined command of Call and (aName) cannot be used.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred,” and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred”

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-able when using the “Special Dialing” com-mand and the “Send” command during acall).

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when usingthe “Special Dialing” command).

● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (availableonly when storing a phone book number).

● You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#”at any time in any position of the phonenumber (available only when using “SpecialDialing” command).

See “List of voice commands” and “SpecialDialing” in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at anytime. Please use the “Help” command to getinformation on how to use the system.


CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate aVR session or answer an incomingcall.

You can also use the buttonto interrupt the system feedbackand give a command at once. See“List of voice commands” and“During a call” in this section formore information.

PHONE/ENDWhile the voice recognition systemis active, press and hold thebutton for 5 seconds to quit thevoice recognition system at anytime.

TUNING SWITCHWhile using the voice recognitionsystem, tilt the tuning switch up ordown to manually control thephone system.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you getstarted using the Bluetooth� Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth� Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this sec-tion.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). To select the current language,press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. Toselect a different language, tilt the tuning

switch ( or ) up or down.

LHA1086


NOTE:

You must press the button within 5seconds to change the language.

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Connect phone” �A

“Add phone” �B

Initiate from handset �C

Name phone �D

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Connect phone” �A . The system ac-knowledges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Add phone” �B . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiatepairing from the phone handset �C .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemodel. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-lular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for thephone �D .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired andthe name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” �A

“Phone Number” �B

Speak the digits �C

“Dial” �D

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” �A . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10digits or any special characters.

3. Say “Phone Number” �B . The system ac-knowledges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting withthe area code in single digit format �C . If thesystem has trouble recognizing the correctphone number, try entering the number inthe following groups: 3-digit area code,3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “fivefive five” as the 1st group, then “one twoone” as the 2nd group, and “three three five


four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than10 digits or any special characters, say“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-bers” in this section for more information.

5. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” �D . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phonebook”

“Recent Calls”

“Connect Phone”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hearthe list of commands currently available any timethe system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

(Speak name) �A

“Phone Number”

(Speak Digits) �B

“Special Number” �C

“Redial” �D

“Call Back” �E

(Speak Name) �A

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.

See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how tostore entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.


(Speak Digits) �B

When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”in this section for more details.

“Special Number” �C

For dialing more than 10 digits or any specialcharacters, say “Special Number”. When thesystem acknowledges the command, the systemwill prompt you to speak the number.

“Redial” �D

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call back” �E

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers, “*” or “#”duringa call. For example, if you were directed todial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth�Hands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

To reconnect the call from the cellular phoneto the Bluetooth Hands-Free System, pressthe button.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.


“Phonebook” (phones withoutautomatic phonebook downloadfunction)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“Transfer Entry” �A

“Delete Entry” �B

“List Names” �C

For phones that do not support automatic down-load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth� pro-file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.

The phonebook stores up to 40 names for eachphone paired with the system.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-book if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“Transfer entry” �A

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phonenumber stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber.

“Delete Entry” �B

Use the Delete Entry command to erase oneentry from the phonebook. After the system rec-ognizes the command, speak the name to deleteor say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List names” �C

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames in the phonebook.

The system recites the phonebook entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.


“Phonebook” (phones with automaticphonebook download function)

NOTE:

The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-able when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phonebook”

“List Names” �A

“Transfer Entry” �B

“Delete Entry” �C

“Record Name” �D

For phones that support automatic download ofthe phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth� profile), the“Phonebook” command is used to manage en-tries to the vehicle phonebook. You can say thename of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing ofthat entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1000 names foreach phone paired with the system.

When a phone is connected to the system, thephonebook is automatically downloaded to thevehicle. This feature allows you to access yourphonebook from the Bluetooth� system and callcontacts by name. You can record a customvoice tag for contact names that the system has

difficulty recognizing. For more information see“Record Name” in this section.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-book if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“List names” �A

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session. See the“Record Name” command in this section for in-formation about recording custom voice tags forlist entries that the system has difficulty pro-nouncing.

“Transfer entry” �B

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phonenumber stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” in this section formore information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the Bluetooth� communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.


The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber.

“Delete Entry” �C

Use the Delete Entry command to erase oneentry from the phonebook. After the system rec-ognizes the command, speak the name to deleteor say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“Record name” �D

The system allows you to record custom voicetags for contact names in the phonebook that thevehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature canalso be used to record voice tags to directly dialan entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voicetags can be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”

Main Menu

“Recent Calls”

“Outgoing” �A

“Incoming” �B

“Missed” �C

Use the Recent Calls command to access out-going, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” �A

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoingcalls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” �B

Use the Incoming command to list the incomingcalls made to the vehicle.

“Missed” �C

Use the Missed command to list the calls made tothe vehicle that were not answered.

“Connect Phone”

NOTE:

The Add Phone command is not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Connect Phone”

“Add Phone” �A

“Select Phone” �B

“Delete Phone” �C

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” �D

Use the Connect Phone commands to managethe phones connecting to the vehicle or to enablethe Bluetooth� function on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” �A

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone tothe vehicle. See “Pairing procedure” in this sec-tion for more information.

“Select Phone” �B

Use the Select Phone command to select from alist of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-tem will list the names assigned to each phoneand then prompt you for the phone you wish toselect. Only one phone can be active at a time.

“Delete Phone” �C

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aphone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-tem will list the names assigned to each phoneand then prompt you for the phone you wish todelete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will alsodelete that phonebook for that phone.

“Turn Bluetooth OFF” �D

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to preventa wireless connection to your phone.


SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. Thesystem is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for each connected phone.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” in thissection.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phonebook transfer entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● incoming

● transfer entry

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phonebook delete entry

● next entry

● dial star two one seven oh

● yes

● no

● select

● missed

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on


● outgoing

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● record name

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phonebook list names

● call eight oh five four one

● correction

● connect phone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● previous entry

● delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the voice recognition system, it ispossible to select menu options by using thesteering wheel controls instead of speaking voicecommands. The manual control mode does notallow dialing a phone number by digits. The usermay select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,exit the manual control mode by pressing andholding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At thattime, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) buttonwill start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips● To enter manual control mode, start the

voice recognition system and tilt the tuning( ) switch up or down. The system willspeak �Showing Manual Options� whenmanual controls are initially activated.

● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning( ) switch up or down. The system willalways speak the current menu option. De-pending on the audio display, it will alsoshow the current menu option.

● To select the current menu option, press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button.

● To go back to the previous menu, press thePHONE/END ( ) button. If the currentmenu is the Main Menu, pressing thePHONE/END ( ) button will exit thePhone system.

● To exit the manual control mode, press andhold the PHONE/END ( ) button for 5seconds.


TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


MEMO


5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Automatic transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Automatic transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 5-34Hill start assist system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

WARNING



EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the lift gate and rear windowsclosed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withthe lift gate or rear windows open, fol-low these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the lift gate or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflateall 4 tires to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving 5-3

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureof all 4 tires are adjusted. After the tires areinflated to the recommended pressure, thevehicle must be driven at speeds above 16MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS andturn off the low tire pressure warning light.Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tirepressure.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (alsoreferred to as the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label) is located in thedriver’s door opening.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section for changing aflat tire.)

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.


Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROADDRIVING PRECAUTIONSUtility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-ger cars to make them capable of performing in avariety of on-pavement and off-road applications.This gives them a higher center of gravity thanordinary cars. An advantage of higher groundclearance is a better view of the road, allowingyou to anticipate problems. However, they are notdesigned for cornering at the same speeds asconventional two-wheel drive vehicles any morethan low-slung sports cars are designed to per-form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If atall possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. Aswith other vehicles of this type, failure to operatethis vehicle correctly may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautionslater in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt asoutlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.


OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheelsmay unintentionally leave the road surface. If thisoccurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-ing the procedure below. Please note that thisprocedure is only a general guide. The vehiclemust be driven as appropriate based on the con-ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-hicle to follow the road while vehicle speedis reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-hicle back onto the road surface until vehiclespeed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn thesteering wheel until both tires return to theroad surface. When all tires are on the roadsurface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-propriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return thevehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,road or traffic conditions, gradually slow thevehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occurif the tire is punctured or is damaged due tohitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure losscan also be caused by driving on under-inflatedtires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingand stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayspeeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-ing the correct air pressure and visually inspectthe tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels andtires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses airpressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintaincontrol of the vehicle by following the procedurebelow. Please note that this procedure is only ageneral guide. The vehicle must be driven asappropriate based on the conditions of the ve-hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.Losing control of the vehicle may cause acollision and result in personal injury.● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.● Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe locationoff the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to graduallystop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andeither contact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire or see “Changing a flattire” in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.


DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal andoff-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed forleisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are lesscapable than four-wheel drive models for roughroad driving and extrication when stuck in deepsnow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

● Drive carefully when off the road andavoid dangerous areas. Every personwho drives or rides in this vehicleshould be seated with their seat beltfastened. This will keep you and yourpassengers in position when drivingover rough terrain.

● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-stead drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. Off-road vehicles cantip over sideways much more easilythan they can forward or backward.

● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.If you drive up them, you may stall. Ifyou drive down them, you may not beable to control your speed. If you driveacross them, you may roll over.

● Do not shift gears while driving ondownhill grades as this could causeloss of control of the vehicle.

● Stay alert when driving to the top of ahill. At the top there could be a drop-offor other hazard that could cause anaccident.

● If your engine stalls or you cannot makeit to the top of a steep hill, never at-tempt to turn around. Your vehiclecould tip or roll over. Always backstraight down in R (Reverse) gear. Neverback down in N (Neutral) or with theclutch depressed (manual transmissionvehicles), using only the brake, as thiscould cause loss of control.

● Heavy braking going down a hill couldcause your brakes to overheat and fade,resulting in loss of control and an acci-dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a lowgear to control your speed. Use the hilldescent control feature (if soequipped).


● Unsecured cargo can be thrown aroundwhen driving over rough terrain. Prop-erly secure all cargo so it will not bethrown forward and cause injury to youor your passengers.

● To avoid raising the center of gravity ex-cessively, do not exceed the rated capac-ity of the roof rack/gear bin (if soequipped) and evenly distribute the load.Secure heavy loads in the cargo area asfar forward and as low as possible. Donot equip the vehicle with tires largerthan specified in this manual. This couldcause your vehicle to roll over.

● Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel when driving off-road.The steering wheel could move sud-denly and injure your hands. Insteaddrive with your fingers and thumbs onthe outside of the rim.

● Before operating the vehicle, ensurethat the driver and all passengers havetheir seat belts fastened.

● Always drive with the floor mats inplace as the floor may become hot.

● Lower your speed when encounteringstrong crosswinds. With a higher centerof gravity, your NISSAN is more af-fected by strong side winds. Slowerspeeds ensure better vehicle control.

● Do not drive beyond the performancecapability of the tires, even with 4WDengaged.

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off the groundand shift the transmission to any drive orreverse position with the engine running.Doing so may result in drivetrain damageor unexpected vehicle movement whichcould result in serious vehicle damage orpersonal injury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states for emissions testing), orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

● Accelerating quickly, sharp steeringmaneuvers or sudden braking maycause loss of control.

● If at all possible, avoid sharp turningmaneuvers, particularly at high speeds.Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehiclehas a higher center of gravity than apassenger car. The vehicle is not de-signed for cornering at the same speedsas passenger cars. Failure to operatethis vehicle correctly could result in lossof control and/or a rollover accident.

● Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,or radial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-ately after driving in mud or water. See“Brake system” later in this section for“Wet brakes”.

● Avoid parking your vehicle on steephills. If you get out of the vehicle and itrolls forward, backward or sideways,you could be injured.

● Whenever you drive off-road throughsand, mud or water as deep as thewheel hub, more frequent maintenancemay be required. See “Periodic mainte-nance” in the “NISSAN Service andMaintenance Guide.”


WARNING

● Never remove the ignition key or placethe ignition switch in the LOCK positionwhile driving. The steering wheel willlock (for models with a steering lockmechanism). This may cause the driverto lose control of the vehicle and couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)The ignition lock is designed so the ignitionswitch cannot be placed in the LOCK positionand the key removed until the shift selector ismoved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition, makesure the shift selector is in the P (Park) position.

If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park)position, the ignition switch cannot be moved tothe LOCK position.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

2. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

3. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park)position after the ignition switch is placed in theOFF position or when the ignition switch cannotbe turned to the LOCK position, proceed asfollows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ONposition.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector is designed so it cannot movedout of P (Park) and into any of the other gearpositions if the ignition key is turned to OFFposition or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector can be moved if the igni-tion switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

WSD0041

IGNITION SWITCH


There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the ignition switch.When the ignition is in the OFF position,the steering wheel is not locked (for mod-els with a steering lock mechanism).

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi-tion, turn the steering wheel to the left orright while turning the key to unlock thekey cylinder.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)The ignition switch includes a device that helpsprevent accidental removal of the key while driv-ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position from the ACC orON position, place the ignition switch in the OFFposition, push the key in, then place the ignitionswitch in LOCK position.

KEY POSITIONSLOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

WSD0052


NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF orLOCK position, and wait approximately 10seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid asfrequently as possible, or at least wheneveryou refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe ignition switch is turned to the ON (3)position. See “Warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector cannot be moved outof the P (Park) position and into any ofthe other gear positions if the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position orif the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector is in any of the drivingpositions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-press the clutch pedal to the floor whilecranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the clutch pedal is fully de-pressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by placing the ignitionswitch in the START position. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE


● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by plac-ing the ignition in the START position.Release the key when the engine starts. Ifthe engine starts, but fails to run, repeatthe above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.Always depress the brake pedal untilshifting is completed. Failure to do socould cause you to lose control andhave an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shiftselector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out ofthe P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignition switch isplaced in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


To move the shift selector:

: Push the button while depressing thebrake pedal

: Push the button to shift

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector out of the P(Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-tor is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACCposition for any reason while the vehicle is in N(Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignitionswitch cannot be placed in the LOCK positionand the key cannot be removed from the ignitionswitch. Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position, then the ignition switch can be placed inLOCK.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift selector position when thevehicle is parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift selector from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park). Apply theparking brake. When parking on a hill, apply theparking brake first, then move the shift selectorinto the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the shiftselector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or anydrive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

LSD0151


D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

3 (Third gear):

Use this position for driving up and down longslopes where engine braking would be advanta-geous.

Do not downshift into the 3 position at speedsover the following and do not exceed the follow-ing speeds in the 3 position.

2WD:

99 MPH (160 km/h)

4H:

99 MPH (160 km/h)

4LO:

37 MPH (60 km/h)

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak-ing on downhill grades.


2WD:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

21 MPH (35 km/h)

1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.


2WD:

37 MPH (60 km/h)

4H:

37 MPH (60 km/h)

4LO:

12 MPH (20 km/h)

Shift lock releaseIf the battery is discharged, the shift selector maynot be moved from the P (Park) position even withthe brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector, release the shift lock.The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral).However, the steering wheel will be locked un-less the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-tion (for models with a steering lock mechanism).This allows the vehicle to be moved if the batteryis discharged.

LSD0141


To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)position while holding down the shift lockrelease.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON positionto unlock the steering wheel (for models witha steering lock mechanism).

7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de-sired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: With the engine running and theshift selector in the D (Drive)position, the transmission upshiftsinto Overdrive as vehicle speedincreases.

Overdrive does not engage until the enginehas reached operating temperature.

LSD0142


OFF: For driving up and down longslopes where engine braking is nec-essary push the Overdrive switchonce. The O/D OFF indicator lightin the instrument panel comes on atthis time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing agentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shiftshocks as the transmission shifts into and out ofOverdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. TheO/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panelcomes on at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.This reduces fuel economy.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-ing to a lower gear. This may cause aloss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may cause clutchdamage.

● Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

● Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

● When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running (for example, at a stoplight), shift to N (Neutral) and releasethe clutch pedal with the foot brakeapplied.

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift intothe appropriate gear, then release the clutchslowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressedbefore the transmission is shifted, a gear noisemay be heard. Transmission damage could oc-cur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according tovehicle speed.

LSD0148


To back up depress the shift selector and thenmove it to the R (Reverse) position after stoppingthe vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R(Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral), thenrelease the clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutchpedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (First).

If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel drive, see“Transfer case shifting procedures” later in thissection.

Suggested upshift speedsThe following are suggested vehicle speeds forshifting into a higher gear. These suggestionsrelate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.Actual upshift speeds will vary according to roadconditions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

● Two-wheel drive models and four-wheeldrive models (2H and 4H position):

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 11 (18)

2nd to 3rd 17 (27)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 32 (51)

5th to 6th 45 (72)

● 4–wheel drive model (4L position):

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd —

2nd to 3rd —

3rd to 4th —

4th to 5th —

5th to 6th —

Suggested maximum speed in eachgearDownshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,use the highest gear suggested for that speed.Always observe posted speed limits, and driveaccording to the road conditions, which will en-sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it may causeengine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Allowable maximum speed in each gear:

2–wheel drive models

GEAR MPH (km/h)1st 35 (56)2nd 60 (97)3rd 87 (141)4th —5th —6th —

4–wheel drive models

2H/4H position

GEAR MPH (km/h)1st 34 (55)2nd 60 (97)3rd 87 (140)4th —5th —6th —

4L position

GEAR MPH (km/h)1st 13 (21)2nd 22 (36)3rd 33 (53)4th 45 (72)5th 57 (93)6th —


WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the shift selector in place ofthe parking brake. When parking, besure the parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up �A .

To release:1. Firmly apply the foot brake.2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)position.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake leverslightly, push the button �B and lower thelever completely .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. ON/OFF switch4. CANCEL switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off and have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LSD0150 WSD0153

PARKING BRAKE CRUISE CONTROL


● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control main switch is turned ONwhile pushing the ACCEL/RES,COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (locatedon the steering wheel). To properly set thecruise control system, use the following pro-cedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressingthe clutch pedal when the cruise control isset. Should this occur, depress the clutchpedal and turn the main switch off imme-diately. Failure to do so may cause enginedamage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SETswitch. The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission), or move the shift selector to N(Neutral) (automatic transmission).


To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.Improper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY


● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● For vehicles equipped with , use 4Hor 4L position only when necessary. Four-wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.

WARNING

● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off theground and shift the transmission toany drive or reverse position with theengine running. Doing so may result indrivetrain damage or unexpected ve-hicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personalinjury.

● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer(such as the dynamometers used bysome states for emissions testing), orsimilar equipment even if the other twowheels are raised off the ground. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with 4WDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment mayresult in drivetrain damage or unex-pected vehicle movement which couldresult in serious vehicle damage or per-sonal injury.

CAUTION

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:


– in the 4LO position for automatictransmission vehicles, stop the ve-hicle and shift the shift selector tothe N position with the brake pedaldepressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for manual trans-mission vehicles, stop the vehicleand shift the shift selector to the Nposition with the clutch pedal de-pressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.


USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE(4WD)


TRANSFER CASE SHIFTINGPROCEDURESThe part time 4WD system provides 3 positions(2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select thedesired drive mode according to the driving con-ditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD ShiftSwitch Position

WheelsDriven

Indicator LightUse Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, pavedroads (Economy drive)

Move the 4WD switch.2WD <—> 4H4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift position en-gaged.

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandyor snow-covered roads

Neutral

*1May blink

Neutral disengages theautomatic transmissionmechanical parking lock,which will allow the vehicleto roll. Do not leave thetransfer shift position inNeutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle.2. For automatic transmission vehicles: Shift the shift selector to

the (N) position with the brake pedal depressed.For manual transmission vehicles: Shift the shift selector to the(N) position with the clutch depressed.

3. For automatic transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H with the brake pedal de-pressed.For manual transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the 4WDswitch to 4LO or 4H with the clutch pedal depressed.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THEVEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THESHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-SION VEHICLES. FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHICLESYOU MUST MOVE THE SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximumpower and traction is re-quired (for example: onsteep grades or rocky,sandy, muddy roads)


*1: Before moving the shift selector from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shift procedure is completedand the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind,not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.

- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch �OFF�.

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

3. Apply the parking brake, for automatic transmission vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector to Neutral position. For manualtransmission vehicles, move the shift selector to Neutral position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed on automatic transmission vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on manual transmission vehicles, move the 4WDshift switch to desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift selector from Neutral position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be ON and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicatorlights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light (if so equipped) willalso turn on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” later in this section.


The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used toselect either 2WD or 4WD depending on thedriving conditions. There are three types of drivemodes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls thetransfer case operation. Rotate the switch tomove between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicleMUST be stationary, shift the shift selectorto Neutral (N), and for automatic transmis-sion vehicles depress the brake pedal orfor manual transmission vehicles depressthe clutch pedal. The switch must be de-pressed and turned when changing into orout of 4LO.

WARNING

● When parking, apply the parking brakebefore stopping the engine and makesure that the 4WD shift indicator light ison and the ATP warning light goes off.Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect-edly move even if the automatic trans-mission is in the P position.

● The 4LO indicator light must stop blink-ing and remain illuminated or turn offbefore shifting the transmission intogear. If the shift selector is shifted fromthe (N) position to any other gear whenthe 4LO indicator light is blinking, thevehicle may move unexpectedly.

CAUTION

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

● The 4H position provides greater trac-tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it willcause increased fuel consumption andhigher oil temperatures, and coulddamage drivetrain components.Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H isnot recommended

● The 4LO position provides maximumpower and traction. Avoid raising ve-hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-mum speed is approximately 31 MPH(50 km/h).

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switch whenmaking a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-tween 2WD and 4H) while driving onsteep downhill grades. Use the enginebrake and low automatic transmissiongears (D1 or D2) or manual transmis-sion (1st gear or 2nd gear) for enginebraking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switch(between 2WD and 4H) with the rearwheels spinning.

● Do not drive on dry hard surface roadsin the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dryhard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may causeunnecessary noise and tire wear.NISSAN recommends driving in the2WD position under these conditions.

● The 4WD transfer case may not beshifted between 4H and 4LO at low am-bient temperatures and the transfer4LO position indicator light may blinkeven when the 4WD shift switch isshifted. After driving for a while you canchange the 4WD transfer case between4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

● Drive carefully according to the road surfaceconditions.


When the vehicle is stuck,

● Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

● Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential(E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn theswitch ON while the vehicle is stationary andapply the throttle to try to free the vehicle.

● If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock thevehicle back and forth between reverse anddrive gears.

● If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, placestones or wooden blocks under the tires.Then try the recovery procedures above. Tirechains may be effective.

CAUTION

● Do not spin the tires excessively. Tireswill sink deep into the mud, making itdifficult to free the vehicle.

● Avoid shifting gears with the enginerunning at high speeds as this maycause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

● Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending ondriving conditions.

● If the 4WD shift switch is operatedwhile making a turn, accelerating ordecelerating or if the key switch isturned off while in the 4H or 4LO posi-tion, you may feel a jolt. This is notabnormal.

● When the vehicle is stopped after mak-ing a turn, you may feel a slight joltafter the shift selector is shifted to N orP. This occurs because the transferclutch is released and not because of amalfunction.

CAUTION

● When driving straight, shift the 4WDshift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.Do not move the 4WD shift switch whenmaking a turn or reversing.

● Do not shift the 4WD shift switch whiledriving on steep downhill grades. Usethe engine brake and low automatictransmission gears (D1 or D2) ormanual transmission (1st gear or 2ndgear) for engine braking.

● Do not operate the 4WD shift switchwith the rear wheels spinning.

● Before placing the 4WD shift switch inthe 4H position from 2WD, ensure thevehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100km/h). Failure to do so can damage the4WD system.

● Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD0145


4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in theodometer display.

The light should turn off within 1 second afterturning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi-cator light will illuminate the position selected bythe 4WD shift switch.

● The 4WD shift indicator light may blinkwhile shifting from one drive mode tothe other. When the shifting is com-pleted, the 4WD shift indicator lightwill come on.

● If the 4WD warning light comes on, the4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

If the 4WD shift indicator light indicationchanges to 2WD when the 4WD shiftswitch is shifted to the 4H position at lowambient temperatures, the 2WD modemay be being engaged due to malfunc-tioning drive system. If the indicator doesnot return to normal and the 4WD warninglight comes on, have the system checkedby the nearest NISSAN dealer.

4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinkswhen:

Comes onThere is a malfunc-tion in the 4–wheel

drive system

Blinks slowlyThe difference inwheel rotation is

large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon afterthe engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD systemwhen the ignition switch is ON, the warning lightwill either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WDshift indicator light goes out.

A large difference between the diameters of frontand rear wheels will make the warning light blinkslowly (about once per two seconds). Changethe 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drivefast.

CAUTION

● If the warning light comes on or blinksslowly during operation, have your ve-hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer assoon as possible.

● Shifting between 4H and 4LO is notrecommended when the 4WD warninglight turns on.

LSD0147


● When the warning light comes on, the2WD mode may be engaged even if the4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be especiallycareful when driving. If correspondingparts are malfunctioning, the 4WDmode will not be engaged even if the4WD shift switch is shifted.

● Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LOposition on dry hard surface roads. Driv-ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LOmay cause unnecessary noise, tire wearand increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on whenyou are driving on dry hard surfaceroads:


– in the 4LO position for automatictransmission vehicles, stop the ve-hicle and shift the shift selector tothe N position with the brake pedaldepressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for manual trans-mission vehicles, stop the vehicleand shift the shift selector to the Nposition with the clutch pedal de-pressed and shift the 4WD shiftswitch to 2WD.


● The transfer case may be damaged ifyou continue driving with the warninglight blinking.

The E-Lock system can provide additional trac-tion and should only be used when a vehicle hasbecome or is becoming stuck. This system oper-ates by electronically “locking” the two rear drivewheels together, allowing them to turn at thesame speed. The system is used when it is notpossible to free a stuck vehicle even when usingthe 4LO position (4 wheel drive vehicles).

When added traction is required, activate theE-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. See“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-tem switch” in the “Instruments and Controls”section. Once the system fully engages, the indi-cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON.When the system is activated, both rear wheelswill engage, providing added traction.

The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move toengage the system, and the system will onlyengage up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h).Once the vehicle is free, the system should beturned OFF and driving resumed.

The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabledand the ABS light illuminates when the E-Locksystem is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system is disabled and the VDC lightilluminates when the E-Lock system is ON.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REARDIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (ifso equipped)


WARNING

● Never leave the E-Lock system ONwhen driving on paved or hard-surfacedroads. Turning the vehicle may result inthe rear wheels slipping and result in anaccident and personal injury. After us-ing the E-Lock system to free the ve-hicle, turn the system OFF.

● Use the E-Lock system only when free-ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO positionbefore using the E-Lock system. Neveruse the E-Lock system on a slipperyroad surface such as snow or ice sur-face. Using the E-Lock system whendriving in these road conditions maycause unexpected movement of the ve-hicle during engine braking, accelerat-ing or turning, which may result in anaccident and serious personal injury.

CAUTION

● After using the E-Lock system, turn theswitch OFF to prevent possible damageto driveline components from extendeduse.

● Do not drive the vehicle at speeds fasterthan 12 mph (20 km/h) when the systemis engaged. Doing so could damagedrivetrain components.

● Do not turn on the E-lock system whilethe tires are spinning. Doing so coulddamage drivetrain components.


WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park) forautomatic transmission models or in anappropriate gear for manual transmis-sion models. Failure to do so couldcause the vehicle to move unexpectedlyor roll away and result in an accident.

Make sure the shift selector has beenpushed as far forward as it can go andcannot be moved without depressingthe foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)position. When parking on an uphill grade,place the shift selector in 1st gear.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: �A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: �B

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: �C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels areclose to locking up, the actuator rapidly appliesand releases hydraulic pressure. This action issimilar to pumping the brakes very quickly. Youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear anoise from under the hood or feel a vibration fromthe actuator when it is operating. This is normaland indicates that the ABS is operating properly.However, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra care is re-quired while driving.


Self-test featureThe ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● ABLS is a form of traction control usingsensors from the Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) to transfer power from a slipping drivewheel to a wheel with more traction. TheABLS system applies braking to the slippingwheel, which helps redirect power to an-other wheel.

● On 4WD models the ABLS system operatesin both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD mode isengaged, the ABLS system will operate forboth drive axles. On 2WD vehicles, theABLS system operates on the drive axleonly.

● The ABLS system is always ON unless thesystem detects brake pad overheating. Ifhigh brake pad temperature is detected, itwill turn OFF, but normal brake function willcontinue. ABLS will function even when theVDC system is turned OFF.

WARNING

The ABLS system provides increased trac-tion, but will not prevent accidents due toabrupt steering operation or by carelessdriving or dangerous driving practices.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces, and always drivecarefully.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system usesvarious sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, thesystem will control braking and engine output tohelp keep the vehicle on its steered path.

● When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system is operating, the SLIP indicator inthe instrument panel blinks.

● If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LOthe indicator light will come on andthe VDC system will be turned off. See “Us-ing Four Wheel Drive (4WD)” earlier in thissection.

● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust yourspeed and driving to these conditions. See“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-struments and controls” section.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the Trac-tion Control System may be disabled and theSLIP and indicator lights will not turn offafter 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turnedto the ON position.

Perform the following procedure to reset thesystem:

● Start the engine and set the steering wheelin the straight forward position.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)SYSTEM

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


● Drive the vehicle at speeds above 10 mph(15 km/h) for at least 10 minutes.

● The VDC OFF indicator light should go offindicating the traction control system is op-erational.

● If you interrupt the reset procedure by turn-ing the ignition off, you will need to restartthe reset procedure.

If after driving the vehicle for more than 10 minutesand the SLIP and lights remain illuminatedin the instrument panel, have the vehicle dynamiccontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system off using the VDC OFFswitch, VDC and Traction Control System (TCS)functions will be turned off. The SLIP indicatorwill flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS willstill operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel apulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood. This is normal andindicates that the VDC system is working properly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system isdesigned to help maintain traction withthe road service but does not preventaccidents due to abrupt steering opera-tion at high speeds or by careless ordangerous driving techniques. Reducevehicle speed and be especially carefulwhen driving and cornering on slipperysurfaces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Controlsystem may not operate properly andthe Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica-tor light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANapproved for your vehicle or are ex-tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system may not operateproperly. This could adversely affect ve-hicle handling performance, and theVDC OFF indicator light may come on.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the Vehicle Dynamic Control systemmay not operate properly and the VDCOFF indicator light may come on. Donot drive on these types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control offindicator light may illuminate. This isnot a malfunction. Restart the engineafter driving onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system may not operateproperly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-trol off indicator light may come on.

● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system isnot a substitute for winter tires or tirechains on a snow covered road.


WARNING

● Never rely solely on the hill descentcontrol system to control vehicle speedwhen driving on steep down hill grades.Always drive carefully and attentivelywhen using the hill descent control sys-tem and decelerate the vehicle speedby depressing the brake pedal if neces-sary. Be especially careful when drivingon frozen, muddy or an extremely steepdownhill roads. Failure to control ve-hicle speed may result in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle and possible seriousinjury or death.

● The hill descent control may not controlthe vehicle speed on a hill under all loador road conditions. Always be preparedto depress the brake pedal to controlvehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-sult in a collision or serious personalinjury.

The hill descent control system helps maintainvehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph(25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hilldescent control is useful when engine brakingalone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed.Hill descent control applies the vehicle brakes tocontrol vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-

centrate on steering while reducing the burden ofbrake and accelerator operation.

● When additional braking is required onsteep downhill roads activate the hill de-scent control system by pushing the switchON, see “Hill descent control switch” in the“Instruments and controls” section.

● Once the system is activated the indicatorlight will remain on in the instrument panel,see “Hill descent control system on indicatorlight” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressedwhile the hill descent control system is on, thesystem will stop operating temporarily. As soonas the accelerator or brake pedal is released, thehill descent control system begins to functionagain if the hill descent control operating condi-tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending steepdownhill grades, the hill descent control switchshould be ON and the shift selector in 2 (Secondgear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking.

WARNING

● Never rely solely on the hill start assistsystem to prevent the vehicle from mov-ing backward on a hill. Always drivecarefully and attentively. Depress thebrake pedal when the vehicle isstopped on a steep hill. Be especiallycareful when stopped on a hill on frozenor muddy roads. Failure to prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards may re-sult in a loss of control of the vehicleand possible serious injury or death.

● The hill start assist system is not de-signed to hold the vehicle at a standstillon a hill. Depress the brake pedal whenthe vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.Failure to do so may cause the vehicleto roll backwards and may result in acollision or serious personal injury.

● The hill start assist may not prevent thevehicle from rolling backwards on a hillunder all load or road conditions. Al-ways be prepared to depress the brakepedal to prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards. Failure to do so may resultin a collision or serious personal injury.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (ifso equipped)

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if soequipped)


The hill start assist system automatically keepsthe brakes applied to help prevent the vehiclefrom rolling backwards in the time it takes thedriver to release the brake pedal and apply theaccelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically underthe following conditions:

● The shift selector is shifted to a forward orreverse gear.

● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hillby applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hillstart assist will stop operating completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the shiftselector is shifted to N or P or on a flat and levelroad.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.


To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.


MEMO


6 In case of emergency

First aid kit (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-13

A first aid kit is located on the back door trimpanel. To remove the first aid kit:

�1 Squeeze the latch buttons.

�2 Pull the two straps apart to unfasten.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. If thevehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, theTPMS will activate and warn you of it by the lowtire pressure warning light. This system will acti-vate only when the vehicle is driven at speedsabove 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, referto “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section.

LCE0114

FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped) FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the manual transmission into R(Reverse), or the automatic transmissioninto P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission isshifted into R (Reverse), or the auto-matic transmission into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

In case of emergency 6-3

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks �1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire�2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools1. Fold the rear bench seat cushion forward.

Refer to “Folding the 2nd row bench seat” inthe “Safety–Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section earlier inthis manual.

2. Remove the jack and jacking tools.

3. Find the oval-shaped opening above themiddle of the bumper. Pass the T-shapedend of the jack rod through the opening anddirect it toward the spare tire winch, locateddirectly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it isdesigned to be inserted at an angle asshown.

WCE0044 LCE0115 LCE0117


4. Fit the square end of the jack rod into thesquare hole of the wheel nut wrench to forma handle.

5. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod intothe T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap-ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in

the spare tire winch and turn the jack rodcounterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

6. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,reach under the vehicle, remove the retainerchain, and carefully slide the tire from underthe rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend-ing plate on the wheel and then lift thespare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the illustration for the correctplacement and jack-up points for your specificvehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

WCE0153


2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Thefront tire jack-up points are indicated bystamped arrows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jackas shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until thetire clears the ground.

WCE0154 LCE0087


5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve-hicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

WCE0063


Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label located inthe driver’s door opening.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING


WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)or to P (Park) (automatic transmission).Switch off all unnecessary electrical sys-tems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (�A , �B , �C , �D ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (�) to positive(�) and negative (�) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

WCE0066


CAUTION

● Do not push start this vehicle. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

● Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. At-tempting to do so may cause transmis-sion damage.

● For manual transmission models, nevertry to start the vehicle by towing it.When the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift selectorto N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (automatic transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany of these conditions apply, dollies ora flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSAN

Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (rear) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the front wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

● When towing automatic or manualtransmission models with the frontwheels on the ground or on towingdollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFFposition, and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Neversecure the steering wheel by placingthe ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion. This may damage the steeringlock mechanism (for models with asteering lock mechanism).

● If you have to tow manual transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground (if you do not use towing dol-lies) or four wheels on the ground:

● Always release the parking brake.

● Move the transmission shift selectorto the N (Neutral) position

● Observe the following restricted tow-ing speeds and distances for manualtransmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 MPH (97 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles (805km)

If the speed or distance must necessarily begreater, remove the propeller shaft before towingto prevent damage to the transmission.

�A Automatic Transmissions (AT)�B Manual Transmissions (MT)

WCE0196


Four-wheel drive modelsNISSAN recommends that towing dollies beused when towing your vehicle or place the ve-hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may causeserious and expensive damage to thetransfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle or the towing hooks (if soequipped). Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Use the towing hook (if so equipped)only to free a vehicle stuck in sand,snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehiclefor a long distance using only the tow-ing hook.

WCE0162 LCE0103


● The towing hook is under tremendousforce when used to free a stuck vehicle.Never pull the hook at an angle.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the re-covery device manufacturer’s instructions.

Attach the tow strap to the towing hook (if soequipped).

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys-tem.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive) (automatic transmissionmodels) or 1st (low) and R (Reverse)(manual transmission models).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D (automatictransmission models) or 1st and R(manual transmission models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.


7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily thanwith an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-tion of the air bag system and result inserious personal injury.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affectthe vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,take the following precautions:

● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-manent discoloration when they contact ve-hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-ener in a location that allows it to hang freeand not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip onthe vents. These products can cause imme-diate damage and discoloration whenspilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR


Floor mat positioning aidThis vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s sidefloor mats have a grommet hole incorporated inthem. Position the mat by placing the floor matbracket hook through the floor mat grommet holewhile centering the mat in the footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

LAI0009

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.


8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-mum maintenance requirements with long ser-vice intervals to save you both time and money.However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’sgood mechanical condition, as well as its emis-sions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide”. You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checkingthe tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the TPMStransmitter grommet seal, valve core and capwhen the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the shift selector inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraints andheadrests move up and down smoothly and thelocks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure thatthe brake and clutch fluid level is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.


When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. Move the shift selector toP (Park).

● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFFor LOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition switch is in the OFF posi-tion and the engine is not running. Toavoid injury, always disconnect thenegative battery cable before workingnear the fan.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced bya NISSAN dealer because the fuel linesare under high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS


VQ40DE engine

1. Window washer fluid reservoir2. Fuse/fusible link box3. Fuse and relay box4. Engine oil filler cap5. Engine oil dipstick6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model)7. Air cleaner8. Drive belt location9. Radiator cap10. Power steering fluid reservoir11. Battery12. Engine coolant reservoir

LII0167

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freezesolution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.Additional engine cooling system additives arenot necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant or equivalent with theproper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freezeand 50% demineralized or distilled water.The use of other types of coolant solu-tions other than a Genuine NISSAN LongLife Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent maydamage the engine cooling system.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur-ized tank. When installing the cap, tightenit until a clicking sound is heard.

LDI0436

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks �B . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark �A , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill �C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

LDI0437 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL


CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap �A by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug�B .

5. Remove the drain plug �B with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

WDI0500


7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.


3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter ex-posing the filter.

5. Loosen the oil filter �A with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead toengine damage.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

9. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

WDI0502


When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

● Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. IfGenuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is notavailable, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFmay also be used.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic SATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora-tion in driveability and automatic trans-mission durability, and may damage theautomatic transmission, which is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAXdepending on system fluid temperature. Removethe cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

WDI0282

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID


For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake and clutchsystems. The use of improper fluids candamage the brake system and affectthe vehicle’s stopping ability.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.

● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous andshould be stored carefully in markedcontainers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUIDCheck the clutch fluid level in the reservoir(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level isbelow the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN SuperHeavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluidup to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-quently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

LDI0463 LDI0463

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID


WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the low windowwasher fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames, anelectrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-gen gas generated by the battery is ex-plosive. Explosive gases can causeblindness or injury. Do not allow batteryfluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabricsor painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid cancause blindness or injury. After touch-ing a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

LDI0441

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY


● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● Do not tip the battery. Keep the ventcaps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver asshown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstallthe vent caps.

WDI0224

WDI0529


Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control sys-tem and the vehicle battery may notcharge completely.

● Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltagecontrol system. This system measures theamount of electrical discharge from the batteryand controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor �A is located near the batteryalong the negative battery cable. If you add elec-trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure toground them to a suitable body ground such asthe frame or engine block area.

LDI0454

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROLSYSTEM


1. Power steering fluid pump2. Automatic belt tensioner3. Cooling fan4. Air conditioner compressor5. Crankshaft pulley6. Generator

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt isin poor condition or is loose, have it replacedor adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped �Aspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceiridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-ping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WDI0639 SDI1895

DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS


WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.”

To remove the air cleaner filter:

�1 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleanercover upward.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter.

3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-ing and the cover with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, makesure the air cleaner cover is seated in thehousing and latch the clips.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if soequipped)The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

WDI0712

AIR CLEANER


To replace the filter, perform the following proce-dure:

1. Open the glove box and press in on thesides so that it will open completely allowingit to hang by the cord.

2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove thefilter cover.

LDI0442 LDI0387


NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows.The end of the filter with the arrow shouldface the rear of the vehicle. The arrowsshould face downward.

3. Insert the first filter into the housing and slideit over to the right. Insert the second filterinto the housing.

4. Replace the filter cover.

5. Install the glove box door.

CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

�2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

�3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

LDI0404 WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


6. Return the wiper to its original position andrelease it until it has made contact with thewindshield.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle �A . This maycause clogging or improper windshield washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin �B .

WDI0595


Rear window wiper blade

�1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-dow.

�2 Push the wiper blade in and pivot until theblade becomes free.

�3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm andsnap into place.

WDI0292


If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

Two types of fuses are used. Type �A is used inthe fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type�B is used in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

LDI0455

BRAKES FUSES


If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI0444


5. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with a newfuse �B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open �A , replace it with anequivalent good fuse �B .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0452 LDI0445Type A

WDI0452


CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery or removed parts.

Type BLDI0456

BATTERY REPLACEMENT


KEYFOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

�1 Open the lid using a coin �A .

�2 Remove the battery �B .

�3 Install a new battery �C with the “+” facingdown.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding thebattery across the contact points will seri-ously deplete the storage capacity.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and electricterminals as it could cause a malfunction.

● When changing the battery, do not let dustor oil get on the keyfob.

● There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat-tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace onlywith the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

�4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

LDI0484


FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Abulb can be replaced from inside the enginecompartment without removing the headlight as-sembly.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

● Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

LIGHTS


Removing the headlight bulb

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector from therear end of the bulb.

4. Turn the bulb retaining ring counterclock-wise until it is free from the headlight reflec-tor and then remove it �A .

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do notshake or rotate the bulb when removing it�B .

Replacing the headlight bulb1. Insert the bulb.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

● Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-tacts the headlight body.

3. Push the electrical connector into the bulbplastic base until it snaps and stops.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

5. Close the hood.

WDI0294


EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*1

Headlight 65/55 9007 (HB5)

Turn signal light/Parking light 29/8 3457AK

Side marker 3.8 194

Off road lights*2 — —

Rear combination light

Turn signal 27 3156AK

Stop/Tail — T20

Back-up 18 921

License plate light 5 168

Fog light (if so equipped)*2 55 H11

Interior light 8 AL48

Map lights 8 AL48

Cargo light 8 AL48

High-mounted stop light*2 — —

*1Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

*2The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.


1. Map lights2. Off road lights (if so equipped)3. Interior light4. Fog light (if so equipped)5. Headlight assembly6. Cargo light7. High-mount stoplight8. Rear combination light9. License plate light

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/orcover.

: Indicates bulb removal

: Indicates bulb installationWDI0671

WDI0295


Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth �1 to protect the housing.Map lights

LDI0478

Interior light/Cargo lightWDI0206

Rear combination lightLDI0448


If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section of thismanual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “Incase of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.The Tire and Loading Information label isaffixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weight ca-pacity is indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped). Do not load your ve-hicle beyond this capacity. Over-loading your vehicle may result inreduced tire life, unsafe operat-ing conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable han-dling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specified ca-pacity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

WHEELS AND TIRES


● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.

Tire and loading information label

�1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

�2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

�3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

�4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

�5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

LDI0485


�6 Spare tire size or compact spare tiresize (if so equipped).

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire Placard (if soequipped) or the Tire and LoadingInformation label (if so equipped).

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

LDI0393


Size Cold Tire Infla-tion Pressure

Front Original Tire:P265/65R17 110TP265/70R16 111TP265/75R16 114T

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:P265/65R17 110TP265/70R16 111TP265/75R16 114T

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:P265/65R17 110TP265/70R16 111TP265/75R16 114T

240 kPa, 35 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

ExampleWDI0394


�1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0395


�2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment Of Transportation”. The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of the Tire IdentificationNumber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture.

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

�3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

�4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

�5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

�6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

ExampleWDI0396


�7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

�8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing


studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Other typesmay damage your vehicle. Use chain tensionerswhen recommended by the tire chain manufac-turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of thetire chain must be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damage to thefenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, yourvehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clearpaved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section in this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

WDI0258


Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


WDI0259


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, VDC system, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chainclearance, speedometer calibration,headlight aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead to acci-dents and could result in serious per-sonal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equippedwith 4 tires that were the same size andyou are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,install the new tires on the rear axle.Placing new tires on the front axle maycause loss of vehicle control in somedriving conditions and cause an acci-dent and personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics, affectthe VDC system and/or interferencewith the brake discs/drums. Such inter-ference can lead to decreased brakingefficiency and/or early brake pad/shoewear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information”section of this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and may dam-age the transmission, transfer case anddifferential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommendedthat all four tires be replaced with tires of thesame size, brand, construction and tread pattern.


The tire pressure and wheel alignment shouldalso be checked and corrected as necessary.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.


9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Channel tie-down hooks (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 9-16Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-30Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-32

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and LubricantsUS measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal 80 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91) *1Engine oil *8

Drain and RefillWith oil filter change 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt 5.1 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2

• Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8Cooling system

With reservoir2-3/4 gal 2-1/4 gal 10.2 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled waterManual transmission gear oil 2WD 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE

75W-854WD 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt 4.2Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-

tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *3Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*6Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R or equivalent*6Transfer fluid 2-1/8 qt 1-3/4 qt 2.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended *7Front final drive oil 1-3/4 pt 1-1/2 0.85 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity 80W-90, *9,Rear final drive oil With AT

With MT3-3/8 pt4-1/4 pt

2-7/8 pt3-1/2 pt

1.62.0

Genuine NISSAN differential oil synthetic 75W-90 or API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE75W-90 *10

Windshield washer fluid (shared between front andrear wipers)

1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”*3: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterio-

ration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*4: DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner specification label.”*7: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF may cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability, and may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the NISSAN

new vehicle limited warranty.*8: For further details, see “Changing engine oil.”*9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F).*10: See your NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.


ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See “Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals.”

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183


Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/Csystem oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.


ENGINE

Model VQ40DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 241.30 (3,954)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

See the “Emission Control Information label” on the under-side of the hood.

A/T (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug DILFR5A–11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS


WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

16 x 7.0J

17 x 7.5J

Tires

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/65R17

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 178.7 (4,539)

Overall width in (mm) 72.8 (1,849)

Overall height (4wd model) in (mm) 74.9 (1,902)

Front Track in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)

Rear Track in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)

Wheelbase in (mm) 106.3 (2,700)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S.certification label” on thecenter pillar between the

driver’s side front and sidedoors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)


When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI0127 WTI0099 WTI0173


TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

Use the following step to mount the front licenseplate:

● Attach the license plate bracket on the plas-tic finisher at the location mark (smalldimple) using the two 6 mm screws pro-vided.

WTI0100 WTI0167 LTI0137

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE


WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.


Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152


5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of Weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

SECURING THE LOADThere are tie down hooks located in both theceiling and floor of the cargo area as shown. Thetie down hooks can be used to secure cargo withropes or other types of straps. See “Channel tiedown hooks” in this section.

Do not apply a total load of more than 110lbs. (490 N) to a single metal ceiling tie-down hook when securing cargo.

Do not apply a total load of more than 110lbs. (490 N) to a single plastic floor tie-down hook when securing cargo.

WARNING


Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooksLTI0140

Adjustable cargo area floor tie-downhooks

LTI0141


● The child restraint top tether strap maybe damaged by contact with items inthe cargo area. Secure any items in thecargo area. Your child could be seri-ously injured or killed in a collision ifthe top tether strap is damaged.

● Do not load your vehicle any heavierthan the GVWR or the maximum frontand rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of yourvehicle can break, tire damage couldoccur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could result inloss of control and cause personalinjury.

CHANNEL TIE-DOWN HOOKS (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Properly install and tighten the tie-down hooks into the channel system.Also, do not install any rope or strapsdirectly to the channel. Failure to prop-erly install the tie-down hooks or in-stalling ropes or straps directly to thechannel can cause the cargo to becomeunsecured. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo could cause per-sonal injury.


The adjustable channel tie-down hook systemallows you to move tie-down hooks in the cargoarea to the best location to secure a load.

The tie-down hooks must be installed so the hookis properly fixed to the channel. If the tie-downhook is not fixed to the channel it cannot beproperly tightened.

Check the tightness of the tie-down hooks peri-odically during a trip to make sure they have notbecome loose.

Install the tie-down hooks as follows:

1. Assemble 4 hook loops �A to 4 hook plates�B by screwing the hook plate onto the hook(5 revolutions).

LTI0144


2. Insert (at any position) 2 channel tie-downhooks �A into the channel opening �B ofeach channel and slide to the desired posi-tion.

3. Hand tighten each hook until it is securelyfixed to the channel.

4. To reposition the channel tie-down hook un-screw the hook loop from the hook plate (2revolutions), move to a new location, andretighten.

�A Correct, �B IncorrectLTI0145 LTI0146 LTI0147


LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.

�A Correct, �B IncorrectLTI0148


WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR) should not exceed the value specifiedin the following “Towing Load/Specification”chart. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0162

TOWING A TRAILER


Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadWhen using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -15 percent of the total trailer load or use thetrailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu-facturer. The tongue load must be within themaximum tongue load limits shown in the follow-ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If thetongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargoto allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 ATI1025


Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the available towing capacity, usethe following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the“Towing Load/Specification” chart foundlater in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 4,900 lb. (2222 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -5,400 lb. (2449 kg).

● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing Load/Specification” chart -9,658 lb. (4380 kg).

● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-ing Load/Specification” chart - 5,000 lb.(2268 kg).

5,400 lb. (2449 kg) GVWR

– 4,900 lb. (2222 kg) GVW

= 500 lb. (226 kg) Available for tongueweight

9,658 lb. (4380 kg) GCWR

– 4,900 lb. (2222 kg) GVW

= 4,758 lb. (2158 kg) Capacity available fortowing

500 lb. (226 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 4,758 lb. (1994 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.


Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within thetrailer tongue load specification recommendedby the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specification shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.

Trailer frontal area

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer frontalarea specification may exceed the towingcapacity of the vehicle. This may affect thetowing performance and lead to vehicledamage.

The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of atrailer. The frontal area is the total area of thevehicle and trailer that is affected by air resis-tance while towing. Do not exceed the maximumtrailer frontal area specification shown in the�Towing Load/Specification” chart. The frontalarea can be determined by multiplying the width

of the trailer by the height of the trailer. Forexample, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tallhas a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

US & CAN

2WD 4WD

Maximum TowingCapacity*1, *2

5,000 lb.(2,268 kg)

5,000 lb.(2,268 kg)

Maximum TongueLoad

500 lb.(227 kg)

500 lb.(227 kg)

Maximum GrossCombined Weight

Rating

9,656 lb.(4,379 kg)

9,656 lb.(4,379 kg)

Maximum trailerfrontal area

60 sq ft (5.52 sq meters)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculatedassuming a base vehicle with driver and anyoptions required to achieve the rating. Additionalpassengers, cargo and/or optional equipmentwill add weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

*2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system isrecommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.

TOWING SAFETYTrailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optionaltrailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Thishitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity ofthis vehicle when the proper towing equipment isused. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ballthat is rated for the trailer to be towed. GenuineNISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are availablefrom your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optionaltrailer tow package, check the towing capacity ofyour bumper hitch or receiver-type framemounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for yourvehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailerhitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Makesure the trailer hitch is securely attached to thevehicle to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.


WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier than theweight rating of the hitch components.Never exceed the weight rating of thehitch components. Doing so can causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Weight carrying hitchesA weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount isone that is designed to carry the whole amount oftongue weight and gross weight directly on theball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitchThis type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ballmount and to the trailer to distribute the tongueweight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a giventrailer, and need some of the tongue weighttransferred through the frame and pushing downon the front wheels. This gives stability to the towvehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) isrecommended if you plan to tow trailers with amaximum weight over 5,000 lbs. Check with thetrailer and towing equipment manufacturers todetermine if they recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. Ifyou are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surgebrake-equipped trailer, check with thesurge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturerto determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-turer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.With the ignition on and the doors closed,allow the vehicle to stand for several minutesso that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point onthe front and rear bumpers at the center ofthe vehicle.


3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjustthe hitch equalizers so that the front bumperheight is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) ofthe reference height measured in step 2. Therear bumper should be no higher than thereference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributinghitch so the rear of the bumper is nohigher than the measured referenceheight when the trailer is attached. If therear bumper is higher than the measuredreference height when loaded, the vehiclemay handle unpredictably which couldcause a loss of vehicle control and causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-dling. Sway control devices may be used to helpcontrol these affects. If you choose to use one,contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to makesure the sway control device will work with thevehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-tem. Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using the swaycontrol device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,272 kg).

CAUTION

● Special hitches which include frame re-inforcements are required for towingabove 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu-ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts andhitch balls for pickup trucks and sportutility vehicles are available at aNISSAN dealer.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.


Safety chainsAlways use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with theoptional trailer tow package are equipped with a7-pin trailer harness connector. A NISSAN 7–pintow harness kit is available from your dealer. Ifyour trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connec-tor, an adapter will be needed to connect thetrailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are availableat auto parts stores and hitch retailers.

Trailer brakesWhen towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, most statesrequire a separate braking system on trailers witha loaded weight above a specific amount. Makesure the trailer meets the local regulations andthe regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator ismounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic linerunning to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes areactivated by the trailer pushing against the hitchball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulicsurge brakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system, there isno hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-tems are activated by an electronic signal sentfrom a trailer brake controller (special brake-sensing module). If electric trailer brakes areused, see �Electric trailer brake controller� in thissection.

Have a professional supplier of towing equip-ment make sure the trailer brakes are properlyinstalled and demonstrate proper brake functiontesting.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controller

Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re-quire the installation of an aftermarket trailerbrake controller.

A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is availablethat is specifically designed to be used wheninstalling an aftermarket brake controller.

Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake con-troller according to the manufacturer’s instruc-tions.


Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-ently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if soequipped) indicates the transfer case is in4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. Ifthe indicator light is flashing, or theATP light is ON, make sure the transmissionis in P (Park) (AT) and turn the 4WD switchto 2WD or 4H. See “Automatic transmissionpark warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section and “Using four wheeldrive (4WD)” in the “Starting and driving”section.


7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-tain adequate control, reduce your speedand shift to a lower gear. Avoid long orrepeated use of the brakes when descend-ing a hill, as this reduces their effectivenessand could cause overheating. Shifting to alower gear instead provides “engine brak-ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-quently.

● If the engine coolant temperature rises to ahigh temperature, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this owner’s manual.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-mission to a lower gear for engine brakingwhen driving down steep or long hills. Thiswill help slow the vehicle without applyingthe brakes.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-trol not be used while towing a trailer.


● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

Manual Transmission● Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

● On four-wheel drive vehicles, place thetransfer case in the 2H range. Failure to doso will cause the powertrain to bind up.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start andidle the engine with the transmission in Neu-tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engineafter every 500 miles (805 km) of towingmay cause damage to internal transmissionparts.


DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If theMIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” con-dition, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST


WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the shift selector inthe P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.


10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data withthe type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)


To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will onlybe accessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-mitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISIONUnfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION


Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).


MEMO


10 Index4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

A

Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system . . .5-32Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-59, 2-17Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . .4-5, 4-12Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-2, 4-9Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-13Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-22Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-13Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-31Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-28, 4-32Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-26

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-35

AutomaticAutomatic power window switch . . . . .2-46Automatic transmission position indicatorlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-13Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Bluetooth� hands-free phone system . . . . .4-37Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-31Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-29Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-21, 8-22

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-13Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . .9-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-28, 4-32CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-26Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-31Child restraints . . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-27, 1-29

Precautions on childrestraints . . . . . . . .1-27, 1-33, 1-38, 1-41Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-31

Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . .2-21Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Clutch

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . . . .2-33C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-26Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-35Heater and air conditioner controls . . .4-2, 4-9

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-56

D

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-27Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-28Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-16Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-30Engine

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-14Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2

F

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . .2-30Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-51Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

10-2

G

Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-8Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth� . . . . .4-37Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-30Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-26Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . . .4-2, 4-9Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-11

Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Hill descent control system . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-13Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-28Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-28Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-5

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11

C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-10Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-58

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-11Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-59, 2-17Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-29Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-13Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-26Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-26Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-17Off road lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-53Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

10-3

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-17Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . . .2-43Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12Luggage storage(see vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . .2-39

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-28Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-13Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Multi-remote control system(See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-5

N

NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Off road lamps switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Phone, Bluetooth� hands-free system . . . . .4-37

PowerPower door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5On-pavement and off-road drivingprecautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . .1-27, 1-33, 1-38, 1-41Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-14Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-57Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-36Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-28, 4-32FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-35

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

10-4

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-25Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9Remote keyless entry system. . . . . . . . . . .3-5Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-30Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-5Child seat belts . . . . .1-27, 1-33, 1-38, 1-41Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-30

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Seat beltChild safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-26Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-14Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-57Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-24Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-23Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-17

Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

SeatsAdjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-2

Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-23Side air bag system (See supplemental side airbag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-56Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58Starting

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-11Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

SteeringPower steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-35Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-58Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-59, 2-17Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-51Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-58Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-44Switch

Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-46Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . . .2-33Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-30Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-26Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-26Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-31Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6

10-5

Temperature gaugeEngine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6

Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-29Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-31Towing

2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-124-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-22Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

TransmissionDriving with automatic transmission . . . .5-12Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-16

Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-29

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-15Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-31Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-32Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13, 6-14Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-lizer system), engine start . . . . . .2-23, 3-2, 5-11Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

W

Warning4WD warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-59, 2-17Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-13

Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-14Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-14Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-30Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-15Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-17Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-53Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-58Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-46Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-24Wiper

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-24Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

10-6

RECOMMENDED FUEL:Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“Break-in schedule” information found in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-low these recommendations for the future reli-ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

2010 XTERRAOWNER'S MANUAL

2010 N

ISS

AN

XTE

RR

AN

50-D

Printing : July 2009 (09)Publication No.: OM0E-0N50U0

Printed in U.S.A.For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

N50-D

2010 XTERRA OWNER'S MANUAL

Automotive

Transcript of 2010 XTERRA OWNER'S MANUAL